Transcripción de documentos
YAMAHA
SY85 Music Synthesizer
Owner’s Manual 2
- Feature Reference -
GENERAL EDITING PROCEDURE
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE
VOICE EDIT MODE
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE
SONG EDIT MODE
PATTERN EDIT MODE
UTILITY MODE
WAVE EDIT MODE
APPENDIX
CONTENTS
GENERAL EDITING PROCEDURE
■
■
■
■
Mode Selection ............................................. 8
Selecting Specific Edit Functions ............... 8
Selecting & Editing Parameters................ 10
Controller Assignment Display .................. 11
Performance Edit Mode
■ Edit
1: Layer
1: Voice Number ................................. 14
2: Volume ............................................. 15
3: Pan ................................................... 16
4: Tune ................................................. 17
5: Note Limit ........................................ 18
6: Velocity Limit ................................... 20
7: CS Enable ....................................... 22
Layer Data Copy ................................. 23
2: Performance Total Level ..................... 24
3: Performance Name .............................. 25
4: Layer Voice Edit
1: Oscillator .......................................... 26
2: Amplitude EG .................................. 26
3: Filter ................................................. 26
4: Pitch EG .......................................... 26
5: LFO .................................................. 26
6: Controller ......................................... 26
7: Voice Total Level ........................... 26
8: Voice Name ..................................... 26
■ Quick Edit
1: Amplitude EG Offset ............................ 27
2: LFO & Filter Offset .............................. 29
3: Controller Conditions ........................... 31
4: Other Conditions .................................. 33
5: Effect Type ............................................ 35
6: Effect Parameter .................................. 36
■ Effect Edit
1: Mode, Type ........................................... 37
2: Send Select & Level ............................ 38
2
3: Layer Dry Output Select ..................... 40
4: Output Level ......................................... 41
5: Wet : Dry Balance ............................... 42
6: Send & Effect 2 Mix Level ................. 43
7: Effect 1 Parameters ............................. 44
8: Effect 2 Parameters ............................. 44
9: Control Parameters .............................. 45
10: Control LFO ........................................ 47
Effect Data Copy ....................................... 48
Effect Signal Flow Display ....................... 49
■ Job
1: Layer Controller Sync .......................... 50
2: Layer Exchange .................................... 51
3: Performance Edit Recall ..................... 52
4: Performance Initialize .......................... 53
■ Performance Compare ............................... 54
■ Performance Store ..................................... 55
Voice Edit Mode
■ Edit
1: Oscillator ................................................ 58
2: Amplitude EG
1: AEG Level & Rate ......................... 60
2: Level Scaling .................................. 62
3: Sensitivity ........................................ 63
AEG Data Copy ................................... 64
3: Filter
1: Type, Cutoff Frequency ................. 65
2: Cutoff Scaling ................................. 69
3: FEG Level & Rate .......................... 70
4: Filter Sensitivity .............................. 72
Filter Data Copy .................................. 73
4: Pitch EG
1: Level & Rate ................................... 74
2: Range, Sensitivity ........................... 76
Pitch EG Data Copy ........................... 77
5: LFO
1: LFO .................................................. 78
2: LFO Speed Sensitivity ................... 80
LFO Data Copy ................................... 81
6: Controller
1: Pitch Bend Range .......................... 82
2: Modulation Wheel Depth ............... 83
3: Foot Controller Depth .................... 85
4: After Touch Depth .......................... 87
5: CS3 Parameter Edit ....................... 89
6: CS4 Parameter Edit ....................... 91
Controller Data Copy .......................... 93
7: Voice Total Level ........................... 94
8: Voice Name ..................................... 95
■ Quick Edit
1: Wave ...................................................... 96
2: Amplitude EG ........................................ 98
3: Filter .................................................... 100
4: LFO ..................................................... 102
5: Effect Type ......................................... 103
6: Effect Parameter ............................... 104
■ Effect Edit
1: Mode, Type ........................................
2: Send, Mix, Wet : Dry ........................
3: Output Level ......................................
4: Effect 1 Parameters ..........................
5: Effect 2 Parameters ..........................
6: Control Parameters ...........................
7: Effect LFO ..........................................
Effect Data Copy ....................................
Effect Signal Flow Display ....................
105
106
108
109
109
110
112
113
114
■ Job
1: Voice Edit Recall ............................... 115
2: Voice Initialize ................................... 116
■ Voice Compare ........................................ 117
Drum Voice Edit Mode
■ Edit
1: Key Parameters 1 .............................
2: Key Parameters 2 .............................
3: Total Level .........................................
4: Drum Voice Name .............................
Drum Key Data Copy ............................
120
122
123
124
125
■ Quick Edit
1: Effect Type ......................................... 126
2: Effect Send Level .............................. 127
■ Effect Edit
1: Mode, Type ........................................
2: Key Send Select & Level .................
3: Key Dry Output Select .....................
4: Output Level ......................................
5: Wet : Dry Balance ............................
6: Send & Effect 2 Mix Level ..............
7: Effect 1 Parameter2 ..........................
8: Effect 2 Parameter2 ..........................
9: Control Parameters ...........................
10: Control LFO .....................................
Effect Data Copy ....................................
Effect Signal Flow Display ....................
128
129
131
132
133
134
135
135
136
138
139
140
■ Job
1: Key Data Initialize .............................
2: Key Data Exchange ..........................
3: Drum Voice Edit Recall ....................
4: Drum Voice Initialize .........................
141
142
143
144
■ Drum Voice Compare ............................. 145
■ Drum Voice Store .................................... 146
■ Voice Store ............................................... 118
3
15: Velocity Modify ................................ 198
16: Gate Time Modify ........................... 199
17: Crescendo ........................................ 200
Song Edit Mode
■ Multi Edit
1: Voice Select .......................................
2: Volume ................................................
3: Pan ......................................................
4: Effect Send Level ..............................
5: Note Shift ...........................................
6: Tune ....................................................
7: Effect Type, Out Balance .................
8: Song Name ........................................
9: Song Initialize ....................................
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
■ Track Edit ................................................. 157
■ Effect Edit
1: Mode, Type ........................................
2: Send Select & Level .........................
3: Inst Dry Output Select ......................
4: Output Level ......................................
5: Wet : Dry Balance ............................
6: Send & Effect 2 Mix Level ..............
7: Effect 1 Parameters ..........................
8: Effect 2 Parameters ..........................
9: Control Parameters ...........................
10: Control LFO .....................................
Effect Data Copy ....................................
Effect Signal Flow Display ....................
■ Job
1: Copy Pattern ......................................
2: Clear Pattern ......................................
3: Instrument Change ............................
4: Velocity Modify ..................................
202
203
204
205
■ Pattern Name ........................................... 207
166
167
169
170
171
172
173
173
174
176
177
178
■ Job
1: Clear Song ......................................... 179
2: Copy Song ......................................... 180
3: Memory Status/Clear Rhythm Track
.................................................... 181,182
4: Track Mixdown ................................... 183
5: Delete Track ...................................... 185
6: Quantize ............................................. 186
7: Copy Measure ................................... 188
8: Delete Measure ................................. 190
9: Insert Measure ................................... 191
10: Erase Measure ................................ 192
11: Remove Event ................................. 193
12: Clock Move ...................................... 195
13: Transpose ......................................... 196
14: Note Shift ......................................... 197
4
Pattern Edit Mode
Utility Mode
■ Synth Setup
1: System ................................................
2: MIDI 1 (Channel Parameters) .........
3: MIDI 2 (Other Parameters) ..............
4: Program Change Table ....................
5: Velocity ...............................................
210
212
213
215
216
■ SEQ Setup
1: Click Condition ...................................
2: Record Condition ...............................
3: Accent Velocity ..................................
4: Song Chain ........................................
217
219
220
221
■ Bulk Dump
1: all .........................................................
2: synth all ..............................................
3: sequencer all .....................................
4: pattern all ...........................................
5: 1 performance ....................................
6: 1 voice ................................................
7: 1 song .................................................
222
222
222
222
222
222
222
■ Card
1: Card All Load/Save ........................... 223
2: Card Format ....................................... 224
■ Disk
1: Disk All Load/Save ............................
2: Disk All Load/Save Synth ................
3: Disk All Load/Save Seq ...................
4: Disk NSEQ Load/Save .....................
5: Disk Other Load/Save ......................
6: MDR ....................................................
7: Rename/Delete ..................................
8: Backup Disk .......................................
9: Disk Status .........................................
10: Disk Format .....................................
225
225
225
225
225
228
231
232
234
235
Wave Edit Mode
■ Wave Number Select .............................. 239
■ Edit
1: Waveform
1: Wave Assign ................................
2: Wave Name .................................
2: Sample
1: Sample Key Map .........................
2: Sample Data ................................
240
240
243
243
■ Wave Initialize .......................................... 247
■ Sample Dump
1: Sample Dump Recieve ..................... 248
2: Sample Dump Transmit .................... 249
APPENDIX
■ EFFECTS .................................................. 254
Effect Signal Flow Diagrams — Voice
Mode ........................................................ 256
Effect Signal Flow Diagrams — Drum Voice,
Performance, and Song Modes .................. 264
The Effects & Their Parameters .......... 274
■ WAVE MEMORY EXPANSION .............. 285
Memory Installation ................................ 286
■ INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
INITIAL PERFORMANCE “InitPerf” .....
INITIAL NORMAL VOICE “InitVce” ......
INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR PTN” ........
INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR Zones” .....
INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR GMIDI” ....
INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR Efect” ......
INITIAL MULTI “InitSong” .....................
SYSTEM SETUP ....................................
INTERNAL PERFORMANCE LIST (1) ....
INTERNAL PERFORMANCE LIST (2) ....
INTERNAL VOICE LIST (1) ..................
INTERNAL VOICE LIST (2) ..................
INTERNAL VOICE LIST (3) ..................
INTERNAL VOICE LIST (4) ..................
INTERNAL WAVE LIST .........................
BLANK CHART — PERFORMANCE ...
BLANK CHART — VOICE ....................
BLANK CHART — DRUM VOICE .......
BLANK CHART — MULTI ....................
BLANK CHART — SYSTEM SETUP ..
289
290
292
294
296
298
300
301
302
304
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
314
316
317
■ About the Standard MIDI File Format .. 318
■ Wave Card Load ..................................... 250
■ SPECIFICATIONS ................................... 319
■ Wave Disk Load/Save 1 Sample .......... 251
■ ERROR MESSAGES ............................... 320
■ Wave Memory Status Display ................ 252
■ TROUBLE SHOOTING............................ 324
■ INDEX ....................................................... 326
5
GENERAL EDITING
PROCEDURE
■ Mode Selection ........................................... 8
■ Selecting Specific Edit Functions ............... 8
■ Selecting & Editing Parameters ............... 10
■ Controller Assignment Display ................. 11
The SY85 makes editing easy by providing a consistent, logical control
interface via which parameters can be located and edited. Once you’ve learned
the general procedure, you can locate and edit any of the SY85’s many parameters quickly and easily.
■ Mode Selection
All SY85 edit modes are selected via the MODE matrix keys. To select the
VOICE EDIT mode, for example, press the VOICE mode key so that its indicator lights, than press the second SUB MODE key in the VOICE column
(EDIT).
The illustrations here are not available.
■ Selecting Specific Edit Functions
k
l
Once you’ve selected an edit mode, one way to select the various edit
screens and functions it contains is to use the PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys. The
[ ] and [ ] keys step backward and forward through the available screens,
respectively. Hold either of these keys for continuous stepping in the specified
direction.
k
l
An alternative method is to use the [MENU] key. If you press the [MENU]
key ion the VOICE EDIT mode, for example, you’ll see a display something
like this:
VOICE`EDIT`MENU``1ø8````````````````````
`````````````1:Oscillator```````````````
8
GENERAL EDITING PROCEDURE
From this display you can use either the data entry dial or the [-1] and [+1]
keys to directly select any of the 8 available functions, then press the [ENTER/
YES] key to actually select the specified function.
The illustrations here are not available.
k
l
In some cases the PAGE [ ] and [ ] or [MENU] keys will take you to
another entry screen. If you select “3: Filter” after pressing the [MENU] key in
the VOICE EDIT mode, and then press [ENTER/YES], you’ll see the following
display:
FILTER``````````````````````````````````
`````````````````````````````Hit`[ENTER]
“Hit [ENTER]” will be flashing. In this case press [ENTER/YES] again to
access the filter functions. Once in the filter “sub-mode” you can use the PAGE
[ ] and [ ] or [MENU] keys to select the various filter functions, as described above. When you have finished with the filter functions, press [EXIT/
NO] to return to the normal VOICE EDIT mode.
k
l
GENERAL EDITING PROCEDURE
9
■ Selecting & Editing Parameters
Most SY85 edit screens contain several parameters that can be selected and
edited. In most cases you can simply operate the continuous slider immediately
below the parameter you want to edit on the display. Operating a slider automatically moves the underline cursor to the corresponding parameter. In the
example below, for example (this is the VOICE EDIT mode Oscillator screen),
the [CS5] slider can be used to adjust the “Fine” parameter.
OSC``Wave``````Mode`Fine`Note`Rndm``Rvs`
P001`Piano`````norm```+0```+0````0``off`
The parameters can also be edited by first moving the cursor to the required
parameter by pressing the corresponding function key ([F7], for example, would
select the “Rndm” parameter in the above display), and then by using either the
data entry dial or the [-1] and [+1] keys to adjust the parameter’s value.
The illustrations here are not available.
In some special cases you’ll also use the function keys as parameter
“switches,” and the [SHIFT] key is sometimes called into play to access secondary functions. Such exceptions are described in the appropriate sections of
the manual.
10
GENERAL EDITING PROCEDURE
■ Controller Assignment Display
It is possible to assign a wide range of parameters to be controlled by the
[CS1] through [CS4] sliders when playing in the VOICE or PERFORMANCE
PLAY modes. Since it is easy to forget what parameters have been assigned to
which sliders, the SY85 features a controller assignment display that can be
selected temporarily by pressing the [SHIFT] key in the VOICE or PERFORMANCE PLAY mode.
● PERFORMANCE PLAY mode
CS`````1(LFO):Ef1`Mix```````````````````
ASSGIN`2(MW`):Ef2»Hi`Gain```````````````
● VOICE PLAY mode
CS`````1(LFO):Ef1`Mix``````3:----------`
ASSGIN`2(MW`):Ef2»Hi`Gain``4:----------`
● DRUM VOICE PLAY mode
CS`````1(LFO):Ef1`Mix```````````````````
ASSGIN`2(MW`):Ef2»Hi`Gain```````````````
This display shows the names of the parameters assigned to sliders [CS1]
through [CS4] for the current voice or performance combination, so you can
take a quick peek to refresh your memory even while playing.
GENERAL EDITING PROCEDURE
11
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE
1: VOICE NUMBER
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 1:Voice Number → [ENTER/YES]
SY85 performance combinations can have up to four voices assigned to different
“layers” — A, B, C and D. This screen lets you assign voices to the layers.
LAYER`Voice`Number````````<InitVce`>ABCD
````A=¡A1`````B=¡A1`````C=¡A1`````D=¡A1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Voice Number A, B, C, D
Range: off, A1 … H7 (internal & card)
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], [CS8],
[-1] [+1], Dial
After moving the cursor to the layer you want to edit by pressing the [F2],
[F4], [F6] or [F8] function key, use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and
[CARD] keys to select the memory area from which the voice is to be selected,
and then use the GROUP and PROGRAM keys to select the voice. Voices
within the selected memory bank can also be selected directy for each layer by
the [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], and [CS8] keys. Internal and card voices cannot be
mixed.
The voices can individually turned on or off by using the [-] (off) and [+]
(on) keys while holding the [SHIFT] key.
The name of the currently selected voice is shown in the upper right corner
of the display. The characters “ABCD” to the right of the voice name indicate
the status of each voice:
• Capital letter = voice on.
• Lower-case letter = voice muted.
• “-” = voice is off.
For example, “Ab-D” indicates that voices A and D are on, voice B is
muted, and voice C is off.
14
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
2: VOLUME
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 2:Volume → [ENTER/YES]
For optimum balance between the voices in a performance combination, this
screen allows the volume of each voice to be adjusted individually.
LAYER`Volume``````````````<InitVce`>ABCD
``````127ƒ``````127ƒ``````127ƒ``````127ƒ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The name of the currently selected voice/layer is shown in the upper right
corner of the display. The characters “ABCD” to the right of the voice name
indicate the status of each voice: a capital letter if the voice is on, a lower-case
letter if the voice is muted, and a dash if the voice is off.
Volume
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], and [CS8] sliders to adjust the volume levels
of the A, B, C, and D layer voices, respectively. A setting of “0” produces no
sound, while a setting of “127” produces maximum volume. The vertical bar
graphs next to each parameter provide a visual indication of volume levels —
the longer the bar the higher the volume. Voices that are turned off are indicated by “----” on the display.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
15
3: PAN
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 3:Pan → [ENTER/YES]
In multi-layer performance combinations, interesting stereo effects can be produced by placing the output from different layers at different locations in the stereo
sound field. The parameters in this screen determine the position in the stereo sound
field in which the sound from each active layer will be heard (left to right).
LAYER`Pan`L¯¯Æ¯¯R`````````<InitVce`>ABCD
```````+0````````+0````````+0````````+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The name of the currently selected voice/layer is shown in the upper right
corner of the display. The characters “ABCD” to the right of the voice name
indicate the status of each voice: a capital letter if the voice is on, a lower-case
letter if the voice is muted, and a dash if the voice is off.
Pan
Range: -31 … +31
Controls: [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], and [CS8] sliders to adjust the pan positions
of the A, B, C, and D layer voices, respectively. Minus values represent panning to the left, and positive values represent panning to the right. “0” positions the sound of the selected layer in the center of the stereo sound field.
Voices that are turned off are indicated by “---” on the display. The upper line
of the display also shows a graphic representation of the stereo sound field
with “L” representing “left” and “R” representing “right.” As you change the
pan value the vertical bar will appear at the corresponding position on the
graphic display.
16
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
4: TUNE
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 4:Tune → [ENTER/YES]
More than just simple tuning, the note shift and fine tune parameters make it
possible to create harmony and voice-thickening detune effects between layers.
LAYER`Tune`)NtShft(```````<InitVce`>ABCD
``+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The name of the currently selected voice/layer is shown in the upper right
corner of the display. The characters “ABCD” to the right of the voice name
indicate the status of each voice: a capital letter if the voice is on, a lower-case
letter if the voice is muted, and a dash if the voice is off.
NtShft (Note shift)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Individually shifts the pitch of each active element up or down in semitone
steps.
Use the [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], and [CS7] sliders to shift the pitch of the A,
B, C, and D layer voices, respectively. A setting of “-12,” for example, shifts
the pitch of the selected layer down by one octave; a setting of “+4” shifts the
pitch up by a major third.
The Note Shift parameter can be used to transpose a voice to its most
useful range, or to create harmony (intervals) between different layers in a
performance combination.
Voices that are turned off are indicated by “---” on the display.
Fine (Fine tuning)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Allows slight upward or downward pitch adjustment of each active element.
Use the [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], and [CS8] sliders to fine tune the A, B, C,
and D layer voices, respectively.
The maximum minus setting of “-7” produces a downward pitch shift of
approximately 2 cents (a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone), and the maximum
plus setting of “+7” produces an upward pitch shift of approximately 2 cents. A
setting of “0” produces no pitch change.
The Fine parameter allows different layers in a performance combination to
be slightly detuned in relation to each other, thereby “thickening” the overall
sound.
Voices that are turned off are indicated by “--” on the display.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
17
5: NOTE LIMIT
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 5:Note Limit → [ENTER/YES]
The low and high note limit parameters make it possible to create a range of split
keyboard effects using the performance layers. You could have two layers on either
side of a single split point, a four-way split keyboard, or any other possible combination.
LAYER`NoteLimit`)Lo(``````<InitVce`>ABCD
``C≥ `ø`G8```C≥ `ø`G8```C≥ `ø`G8```C≥ `ø`G8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The name of the currently selected voice/layer is shown in the upper right
corner of the display. The characters “ABCD” to the right of the voice name
indicate the status of each voice: a capital letter if the voice is on, a lower-case
letter if the voice is muted, and a dash if the voice is off.
Lo (Low note limit)
Range: C-2 … G8
Controls: [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial,
[SHIFT]+keyboard
Individually sets the low note limit for each active layer (the lowest note
that each layer will produce).
Use the [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], and [CS7] sliders to set the low note limits of
the A, B, C, and D layer voices, respectively. It is also possible to press the
desired note on the keyboard while holding the [SHIFT] key.
The C-2 to G8 range of this parameter covers a full 10-1/2 octaves. “C3”
corresponds to “middle C” on a keyboard.
This parameter, in conjunction with the High Note Limit parameter described below, allows the sound from a layer to be limited to a specific region
of the keyboard. If the Low Note Limit is set to C3 and the High Note Limit
for the same layer is set to C4, for example, the sound from that layer will
only be produced between C3 and C4 — the octave immediately above middle
C. This makes it simple to produce split voices.
If the High Note Limit is set to a note that is lower than the Low Note
Limit for the same layer, the notes between the high and low limits will not
sound.
Voices that are turned off are indicated by “---” on the display.
18
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
Hi (High note limit)
Range: C-2 … G8
Controls: [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial,
[SHIFT]+keyboard
Individually sets the high note limit for each active layer (the highest note
that each layer will produce).
Use the [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], and [CS8] sliders to set the high note limits
of the A, B, C, and D layer voices, respectively. It is also possible to press the
desired note on the keyboard while holding the [SHIFT] key.
See the “Lo” parameter, above, for more details.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
19
6: VELOCITY LIMIT
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 6:VelocityLimit → [ENTER/YES]
The high and low velocity limit parameters make it possible to produce a range of
“velocity switching” effects in which different layers of a performance combination
are set up to produce sound only when the keyboard is played at a certain velocity.
You could, for example, produce a flute sound by playing softly, and a horn sound
by playing harder.
LAYER`VelLimit`)Lo(```````<InitVce`>ABCD
```1`ø127````1`ø127````1`ø127````1`ø127`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The name of the currently selected voice/layer is shown in the upper right
corner of the display. The characters “ABCD” to the right of the voice name
indicate the status of each voice: a capital letter if the voice is on, a lower-case
letter if the voice is muted, and a dash if the voice is off.
Lo (Low velocity limit)
Range: 1 … 127
Controls: [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial,
[SHIFT]+keyboard
Sets the lowest velocity value for a range of velocity values over which
each active layer will produce output.
Use the [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], and [CS7] sliders to set the low velocity
limits of the A, B, C, and D layer voices, respectively. It is also possible to
play any note on the keyboard at the desired velocity while holding the
[SHIFT] key.
Every note played on the keyboard (or external MIDI controller) produces a
“velocity” value that tells the tone generator how hard the note has been
played. The range of MIDI velocity values is from 1 to 127 — thus the 1 ...
127 range of this parameter.
The Low Velocity Limit parameter, in conjunction with the High Velocity
Limit parameter described below, makes it possible to specify a range of velocity values over which the selected layer will produce sound. You could, for
example, set Low Velocity Limit to “60” and High Velocity Limit to “127.”
This would cause that layer to produce output only when a velocity value
between 60 and 127 was received — i.e. when a fairly loud note is played. A
second layer could then be set to produce output only when velocity values
below 60 are received, so that completely different sounds are produced on soft
and loud notes.
Voices that are turned off are indicated by “---” on the display.
20
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
Hi (High velocity limit)
Range: 1 … 127
Controls: [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial,
[SHIFT]+keyboard
Sets the highest velocity value for a range of velocity values over which
each active layer will produce output.
Use the [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], and [CS8] sliders to set the high velocity
limits of the A, B, C, and D layer voices, respectively. It is also possible to
play any note on the keyboard at the desired velocity while holding the
[SHIFT] key.
See the “Lo” parameter, above, for more details.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
21
7: CS ENABLE
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 7:CS Enable → [ENTER/YES]
The CS3 and CS4 sliders can be used to control the level of individual layers or
specified groups of layers in the performance play mode. This screen specifies which
slider controls which layers.
LAYER`CS`Enable`)CS4(`````<InitVce`>ABCD
`off``off``off``off``off``off``off``off
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The name of the currently selected voice/layer is shown in the upper right
corner of the display. The characters “ABCD” to the right of the voice name
indicate the status of each voice: a capital letter if the voice is on, a lower-case
letter if the voice is muted, and a dash if the voice is off.
CS3 Enable
Range: on, off
Controls: [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
The [CS1], [CS3], [CS5], and [CS7] sliders turn CS3 control of layers A,
B, C, and D on or off, respectively.
Voices that are turned off and are not available for editing are indicated by
“---” on the display.
CS4 Enable
Range: on, off
Controls: [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
The [CS2], [CS4], [CS6], and [CS8] sliders turn CS4 control of layers A,
B, C, and D on or off, respectively.
Voices that are turned off and are not available for editing are indicated by
“---” on the display.
22
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
LAYER DATA COPY
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Layer → [ENTER/YES] → [COPY]
This function facilitates performance editing by allowing the layer parameters
from any layer in any other performance (the “source” performance) to be copied to
the current layer. You can copy a layer setup that is close to the type you want, then
edit it to produce the required sound.
LAYER`COPY``````From`Performance```Layer
`````````````````````¡A1:InitPerf`````B`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Performance
Range: Any INTERNAL or CARD performance
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Layer
Range: A, B, C, D
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY keys to
select the memory area from which the source performance is to be selected.
Use the GROUP keys to select the source performance bank, then use the
PROGRAM keys to select the source performance number. The [CS5] slider
and other data entry controls can also be used to select the source performance
number. Use the [CS8] slider to select the source layer.
Once the source performance and layer has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are you sure?” will appear on the display.
LAYER`COPY``````From`Performance```Layer
Are`you`sure`?```````¡G1:InitPerf`````A
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the layer data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
layer edit mode.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
1:Layer
23
PERFORMANCE TOTAL LEVEL
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Total Level → [ENTER/YES]
This parameter sets the overall volume of the current performance combination in
relation to the others, making it possible to match levels for smooth transition when
switching between performance combinations.
PERFORMANCE`Total`Level``
`````````````````80ß
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Total Level
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Adjusts the volume of the current performance.
A setting of “0” produces no sound while a setting of “127” produces
maximum volume. A bar graph to the right of the parameter provides a visual
indication of volume level — the longer the bar, the higher the volume.
24
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
2:Volume
PERFORMANCE NAME
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Name → [ENTER/YES]
Your original performance combinations should naturally have original names.
This function can be used to assign a name of up to 8 characters to the current
performance.
PERFORMANCE`Name``````````````"InitPerf"
[CLR][UPR][LWR][SPC]````````````[†]``[¥]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Name
Range: See character list, below
Controls: GROUP, PROGRAM, [F1] … [F4], [F7], [F8],
[CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Assigns a name of up to 8 characters to the current performance.
Use the [F7] function key to move the character cursor to the left, and the
[F8] function key to move the cursor to the right. Use the GROUP and PROGRAM keys to input a character at the cursor position. Each GROUP or PROGRAM key selects the three characters printed above it in sequence. It is also
possible to use the [-1] and [+1] keys or dial to scroll through the available
characters (see list below).
The sliders, [CS1] through [CS8], independently select characters for the
corresponding character position: [CS1] selects the first character, [CS2] selects
the second character, and so on.
The first four function keys also perform important functions: [F1] clears
the entire name, [F2] selects upper-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM
key entry, [F3] selects lower-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM key
entry, and [F4] inserts a space at the cursor position.
GROUP key
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
A → B → C
D → E → F
G → H → I
J → K → L
M → N → O
P → Q → R
S → T → U
V → W → X
PROGRAM key
[1]:
[2]:
[3]:
[4]:
[5]:
[6]:
[7]:
[8]:
Y → Z → 0
1 → 2 → 3
4 → 5 → 6
7 → 8 → 9
* → & → _
/ → . → ,
’ → ! → ?
# → : → ;
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
3:Name
25
LAYER VOICE EDIT MENU
[PERFORMANCE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Layer Voice → [ENTER/YES]
The Layer Voice Edit menu allows you to access any of the voice edit parameters
for the voice assigned to the currently selected performance layer, without having to
leave the performance edit mode.
LAYER`VOICE`
`````````````````````````````Hit`[ENTER]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] from the entry display (above) to access the layer
voice edit menu.
LAYER`VOICE`EDIT``MENU``1ø8
`````````````1:Oscillator
Use the [CS3] slider, the [-1] and [+1] keys, or the data entry dial to select
the desired voice edit screen, then press [ENTER/YES] to jump to selected
screen. Other voice edit screens can then be selected by using the [ ] and [ ]
keys. The available voice edit screens are listed below:
k
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
l
Oscillator
Amplitude EG
Filter
Pitch EG
LFO
Controller
VOICE Total Level
VOICE Name
While editing the voice parameters in voice edit screens 2 through 7, above,
the PROGRAM keys [1] through [4] (LAYER SELECT A, B, C, and D) can be
used to select a different layer for editing. PROGRAM keys [5] through [8] can
also be used for layer muting.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the performance edit mode when you’re
finished with the voice edit parameters. Refer to pages 58 through 95 in the
“Voice Edit Mode” section for details on the voice edit parameters.
26
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
4:Layer Voice
1: AMPLITUDE EG OFFSET
[PERFORMANCE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:AEG Offset → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters allow the amplitude envelopes of the voices assigned to each
layer to be modified to some degree. The actual amplitude EG of the voices are not
affected, these “offset” values are only effective in the performance mode.
QED`AEG)````R1``R2,3``R4```RR``Vel
`ALL[Lyr:A]`+0```+0```+0```+0```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use PROGRAM keys [1] through [4] (LAYER SELECT A, B, C, and D) to
select the layer to be edited.
Hold the [F1] function key (“ALL”) while editing any of the following
parameters to change its value by the same amount for all layers simultaneously.
R1 (Attack rate)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the “R1” parameter of the voice amplitude EG — see page 60.
Plus (+) values produce a faster attack rate while minus (-) values produce a
slower attack rate.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum EG
attack rates cannot be exceeded.
R2,3 (Decay 1 rate)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the “R2” and “R3” parameters of the voice amplitude EG — see
page 60. Plus (+) values produce a faster decay rate while minus (-) values
produce a slower decay rate.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum EG
decay rates cannot be exceeded.
R4 (Decay 2 rate)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the “R4” parameter of the voice amplitude EG — see page 60.
Plus (+) values produce a faster decay rate while minus (-) values produce a
slower decay rate.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum EG
decay rates cannot be exceeded.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
27
RR (Release rate)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the “RR” parameter of the voice amplitude EG — see page 60.
Plus (+) values produce a faster release rate while minus (-) values produce a
slower release rate.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum EG
release rates cannot be exceeded.
Vel (Velocity sensitivity)
Range: -14 ... +14
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the amplitude EG velocity sensitivity setting (see page 63). Plus
“+” settings increase sensitivity while minus “-” settings reduce sensitivity.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum velocity
values cannot be exceeded.
28
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
2: LFO & FILTER OFFSET
[PERFORMANCE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:LFO,Filter Offset → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters allow the main LFO and filter parameters of the voices assigned
to each layer to be modified to some degree. The actual LFO and filter parameters of
the voices are not affected, these “offset” values are only effective in the performance
mode.
QED``LFO)Speed`Depth`Fltr)Coff`Reso``Vel
`ALL[Lyr:C]`+0```+0``````----``---```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use PROGRAM keys [1] through [4] (LAYER SELECT A, B, C, and D) to
select the layer to be edited.
Hold the [F1] function key (“ALL”) while editing any of the following
parameters to change its value by the same amount for all layers simultaneously.
Speed (LFO speed)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the speed of the LFO (this corresponds to the “Speed” parameter
of the main voice LFO — see page 78). Plus (+) values increase the LFO
speed while minus (-) values reduce the speed.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum LFO
speeds cannot be exceeded.
Depth (LFO depth)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the amplitude, pitch, and frequency modulation depth of the LFO
(this corresponds to the “Pmod”, “Amod”, and “Fmod” parameters of the main
voice LFO — see page 78 and 79). Plus (+) values produce greater modulation
depth while minus (-) values reduce the modulation depth.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum LFO
depth values cannot be exceeded.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
29
Coff (Filter cutoff frequency)
Range: -127 … +127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the filter cutoff frequency (this corresponds to the voice filter
“CutOff” parameter — see page 65). Plus (+) values increase the cutoff frequency while minus (-) values lower the cutoff frequency. This parameter
cannot be used if the filter is set to “Thru”. In this case “----” appears in place
of the parameter value.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum cutoff
frequency values cannot be exceeded.
Reso (Filter resonance)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the height of the filter’s resonant peak (this corresponds to the
filter “Resonance” parameter — see page 68). Plus (+) values increase resonance while minus (-) values reduce resonance. This parameter cannot be used
if the filter is not set to “LPF”. In this case “---” appears in place of the parameter value.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum resonance values cannot be exceeded.
Vel (Velocity sensitivity)
Range: -127 ... +127
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Modifies the filter velocity sensitivity setting (see page 72). Plus “+” settings increase sensitivity while minus “-” settings reduce sensitivity.
No matter how much offset is applied, the minimum and maximum velocity
values cannot be exceeded.
30
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
3: CONTROLLER CONDITIONS
[PERFORMANCE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Controller Condition → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determine how the performance layers are affected by keyboard
aftertouch response, the modulation wheel, and the foot controller.
QED`CTRL)Use`AT``MW```FC`````AT>MW`MW>AT
`ALL[Lyr:A]LyrA`LyrA`LyrA``````off``off
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use PROGRAM keys [1] through [4] (LAYER SELECT A, B, C, and D) to
select the layer to be edited.
Hold the [F1] function key (“ALL”) while editing any of the following
parameters to change its value by the same amount for all layers simultaneously.
AT (Aftertouch)
Range: off, LyrA, LyrB, LyrC, LyrD
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
The aftertouch control settings from the voice assigned to the selected layer
(LyrA, LyrB, LyrC, or LyrD) are applied to the layer being edited (i.e. the
layer selected via PROGRAM keys [1] through [4]). Select “off” to turn
aftertouch control off for the layer being edited.
MW (Modulation wheel)
Range: off, LyrA, LyrB, LyrC, LyrD
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
The modulation wheel control settings from the voice assigned to the selected layer (LyrA, LyrB, LyrC, or LyrD) are applied to the layer being edited
(i.e. the layer selected via PROGRAM keys [1] through [4]). Select “off” to
turn modulation wheel control off for the layer being edited.
FC (Foot controller)
Range: off, LyrA, LyrB, LyrC, LyrD
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
The foot controller control settings from the voice assigned to the selected
layer (LyrA, LyrB, LyrC, or LyrD) are applied to the layer being edited (i.e.
the layer selected via PROGRAM keys [1] through [4]). Select “off” to turn
foot control off for the layer being edited.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
31
AT>MW (Aftertouch ➔ modulation wheel)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
When this parameter is turned “on,” aftertouch can be used to prouce the
same effect as the modulation wheel, in addition to any parameters assigned to
aftertouch.
MW>AT (Modulation wheel ➔ aftertouch)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
When this parameter is turned “on,” the modulation wheel can be used to
produce the same effect as aftertouch, in addition to any parameters assigned to
the modulation wheel.
32
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
4: OTHER CONDITIONS
[PERFORMANCE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Other Condition → [ENTER/YES]
Other parameters that can be individually set for each performance layer are
provided in this screen: sustain enable, pitch envelope generator enable, oscillator
fixed note mode and note number.
QED`OTHER)``Sustain``PEG``Fix`FixNote
`ALL[Lyr:A]``````on```on``off``--F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use PROGRAM keys [1] through [4] (LAYER SELECT A, B, C, and D) to
select the layer to be edited.
Hold the [F1] function key (“ALL”) while editing any of the following
parameters to change its value by the same amount for all layers simultaneously.
Sustain
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns sustain off or on for the selected layer. Interesting effects can be
produced by setting some layers to respond to the sustain footswitch in the
normal way, while others do not sustain at all.
PEG (Pitch EG enable)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns pitch envelope generator control of the selected layer off or on.
Fix (Oscillator fix)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns the oscillator fixed-pitch mode on or off (see page 58). The FixNote
parameter described below can be used to set the note produced when the “fix”
mode is turned on.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
33
FixNote (Oscillator fix note number)
Range: C-2 … G8
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the frequency (note) at which the selected layer will be played when
the “fix” mode is turned on (“---” is displayed in place of the note when the
“fix” mode is turned off).
The C-2 to G8 range of this parameter covers a full 10-1/2 octaves. “C3”
corresponds to “middle C” on a keyboard.
34
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
5: EFFECT TYPE
[PERFORMANCE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:Effect Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a complex, high-performance effect system that can be programmed easily via the parameters presented here and in the following screen.
For a complete list of effect parameters see page 274.
QED`EFFECT)```Type```````````Wet`Balance
``06:Rev.Stage1``57:EQ`->`Sym```50%``50%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Effect Type 1/2
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS1]/[CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS1] selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor, and [CS4] does the same for the EFFECT 2 processor. See page 254 for
more details on the SY85 effect system.
Wet Balance 1/2
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS7]/[CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS7] controls the balance between the direct no-effect sound and the effect
sound of the EFFECT 1 processor, while [CS8] does the same for the EFFECT
2 processor. The higher the value the deeper the effect. See page 254 for more
details on the SY85 effect system.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
35
6: EFFECT PARAMETER
[PERFORMANCE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Effect Param → [ENTER/YES]
QED`EF`PARAM)`<`1:Stge>``)Rev.Time``[s](
`2.5``1.0```45`12.0```+0```+0``0.8``100
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
This screen provides access to the four main parameters each for the current
selected effect 1 and effect 2. The four effect 1 parameters are edited via [CS1]
through [CS4], while the four effect 2 parameters are edited via [CS5] through [CS8].
The parameters are different for each effect (refer to page 274 for details). The
EFFECT mode PARAMETERS screen described on page 44 provides full access to
all 8 effect parameters.
36
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
1: MODE, TYPE
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Mode, Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a dual-processor effect system that includes 90 top-quality
digital effects. Two different effects can be connected in series or parallel, providing
an extensive range of possible configurations.
EF`Mode`````EF1`Type```````EF2`Type``
```2:para```06:Rev.Stage1``57:EQ`->`Sym
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Mode
Range: 0:off, 1:seri, 2:para
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the SY85’s two effect processors are connected in
series (“1:seri”) or in parallel (“2:para”), or whether the entire effect system is
turned off (“0:off”).
EF1 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
EF2 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 2 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
37
2: SEND SELECT & LEVEL
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Send → [ENTER/YES]
The parameters provided here determine to which of the SY85 effect stages the
output from the voice assigned to each layer is sent, and at what level. It is also
possible to control the effect send level via keyboard dynamics and key scaling.
EF`Send`<InitVce`>`Switch`Levl`VelS`Kscl
``Layer=A(¡A1)```1a/-`2a/b`127```+0```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Layer
Range: A, B, C, D
Controls: [CS2], PROGRAM [1] … [4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the layer to be edited. The name of the voice assigned to the selected layer is shown between parentheses on the upper line of the display.
Switch 1a, 1b/2a, 2b
Range: See text below.
Controls: [CS4]/[CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines to which of the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 effect stages the
output from the current layer is sent. The [-1] and [+1] keys can then be used
to turn the stage on (“a” or “b”) or off (“.”). The [CS4] and [CS5] sliders
select the following settings in sequence:
CS4 (EFFECT 1)
CS5 (EFFECT 2)
1./.
1a/.
1a/b
1./b
2./.
2a/.
2a/b
2./b
(a
(a
(a
(a
and b off)
on, b off)
and b on)
off, b on)
(a
(a
(a
(a
and b off)
on, b off)
and b on)
off, b on)
If a “single” type effect is selected then only stage “a” can be selected. If a
“dual” or “cascade” type effect is selected, then both stages “a” and “b” can be
selected. An effect stage that cannot be selected is represented by “-” on the
display.
38
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
Send (Send level)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter adjusts the amount of direct voice signal that is sent to the
effect processors, determining the strength of the final effect sound. A setting
of “0” results in no effect, leaving only the “dry” sound of the voice. The
maximum setting of “127” produces the maximum amount of effect.
VelS (Send velocity sensitivity)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the send level from the selected layer is affected by velocity changes (e.g. keyboard dynamics).
Plus “+” settings produce higher send levels in response to higher velocity
values — i.e. the harder a key is played, the higher the send level, and therefore the deeper the effect. The maximum setting of “+7” produces the maximum level variation in response to velocity changes. Minus “-” settings produce
the opposite effect: lower send level in response to higher velocity. A setting of
“+0” results in no send level variation.
Kscl (Send key scaling)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Allows the send level for the selected layer to be varied across the entire
pitch range (i.e. keyboard range).
Plus (“+”) settings produce a higher send level for the low notes and a
lower send level for the high notes. The maximum “+7” setting produces the
greatest send level variation across the pitch range. Minus (“-”) settings produce the opposite effect — a lower low-note send level and higher high-note
send level. A setting of “+0” results in no send level variation.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
39
3: LAYER DRY OUTPUT SELECT
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Layer Dry Out Select → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determine turn the “dry lines” (i.e. the signal paths which bypasses each effect processor) on or off, determining whether any dry signal output
can occur at OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2.
OUTPUT`Select`<InitVce`>`Dry1`Dry2`
``Layer=A(¡A1)`````````````on```on
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Layer
Range: A, B, C, D
Controls: [CS2], PROGRAM [1] … [4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the layer to be edited. The name of the voice assigned to the selected layer is shown between parentheses on the upper line of the display.
Dry1
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns the “dry line” bypassing the EFFECT 1 signal processor on or off.
When this parameter is turned “off,” the “WET:DRY BALANCE” parameters
(page 42) have no effect.
Dry2
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns the “dry line” bypassing the EFFECT 2 signal processor on or off.
When this parameter is turned “off,” the “WET:DRY BALANCE” parameters
(page 42) have no effect.
40
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
4: OUTPUT LEVEL
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Output Level → [ENTER/YES]
Depending on the selected effects the SY85 effect system can have up to four
separate output levels that are adjusted by the parameters provided in this screen.
EF`OutLevel`1a```1b`````````````2a```2b`
`EF1(sngl)=100%``--`EF2(casc)=``--``100%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b (Effect output levels)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS3], [CS4], [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
The [CS3] and [CS4] sliders adjust the output levels of the effect 1 “1a”
and “1b” stages, respectively, while the [CS7] and [CS8] sliders adjust the
output levels of the effect 2 “2a” and “2b” stages. A setting of “0” turns output
from the corresponding effect stage off, while a setting of “100” produces
maximum output level.
If the selected effect is a “single” type, then only the “1a” or “2a” output
level is available. If it is a “cascade” type, then only the “1b” or “2b” output
level is available. Both the “1a” and “1b” or “2a” and “2b” levels are available
only if the selected effect is a “dual” type. The type of the effects currently
selected for the effect 1 and effect 2 processors are shown in parentheses on
the bottom line of the display. See page 254 for details on the effect stages and
the SY85 effect system in general.
If a controller is assigned to any of the output level parameters (page 45),
an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
41
5: WET:DRY BALANCE
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:Wet:Dry Balance → [ENTER/YES]
The balance between the direct sound of the voice and the effect sound is a
delicate thing. Even slight changes can make a big difference to the final sound. The
parameters provided in this screen provide precise balance control.
EF`Wet:Dry`Balance`````
`````Out1=``50`:`50``````Out2=``50`:`50
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Out1 Wet/Out2 Wet
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS3]/[CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters and the corresponding “Out1 Dry” and “Out2 Dry” parameters, below, work together to balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”)
signals delivered via the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT2 processors. Higher “Wet”
values produce more effect sound in relation to the direct, dry sound of the
voice.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
If a controller is assigned to the “Out1 Wet” or “Out2 Wet” parameter
(page 45), an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Out1 Dry/Out2 Dry
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4]/[CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters and the corresponding “Out1 Wet” and “Out2 Wet” parameters, above, work together to balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”)
signals delivered via the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 processors, respectively.
Higher “Dry” values produce more direct, dry sound in relation to the effect
sound.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
If a controller is assigned to the “Out1 Dry” or “Out2 Dry” parameter (page
45), an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
42
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
6: SEND & EFFECT 2 MIX LEVEL
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Mix Level → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determine the mix level between each effect send and the output
of the preceding effect stage. Refer to the section beginning on page 254 for details
on the overall SY85 effect system.
EF`Mix`Level```EF2``Insert`1b```2a```2b`
````````````````--`````````--```--````0%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
EF2 Mix (Effect 2 mix level)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Mixes the output of the EFFECT 2 processor with that of the EFFECT 1
processor. This parameter can only be used with the “serial” effect mode is
selected. If any other mode is selected (“off” or “para”), “---” appears on the
display in place of the value.
If a controller is assigned to the EF2 Mix parameter (page 45), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Insert 1b, 2a, 2b (Insert level)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters mix the dry signal sent to the corresponding effect stage
with the output of the preceding effect stage. The higher the value the greater
mix level. If the current effect configuration does not allow one of these mix
parameters, “--” will appear in place of the mix level parameter.
If a controller is assigned to the one of these parameters (page 45), an
inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
43
7: EFFECT 1 PARAMETERS
8: EFFECT 2 PARAMETERS
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 7:EF1 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
→ 8:EF2 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
Each of the SY85’s 90 effects has 8 parameters that can be edited via the parameters in this screen to fine-tune the effect.
EF1`PARAM`<Rev.Stage1>```)ER/Rev`Bal[%](
`2.5``1.0```10```32```16````4````0`12.0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Each parameter is controlled by the corresponding slider (i.e. the slider
immediately below each parameter). The [-1]/[+1] keys and data entry dial can
also be used to edit the parameter at which the cursor is currently located.
Refer to page 274 for a complete listing of the parameters provided for
each effect.
44
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
9: CONTROL PARAMETERS
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 9:Control Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 [CS1] and [CS2] sliders can be assigned to control different effect
parameters in real time while playing in the voice or performance modes. The parameters provided in this screen determine which effect parameters are to be controlled
by the [CS1] and [CS2] sliders, the minimum and maximum parameter values, and
assign MIDI control numbers to the same parameters for MIDI effect control.
EF`CTRL)````````(`Min``Max``Additional`
``CS1`:`off````````0%`100%`000:off
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
CS1/CS2 (CS1/CS2 switch)
Range: CS1, CS2
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects [CS1] or [CS2] for assignment.
Parameter (Effect parameter)
Range: Depends on selected effects.
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the effect parameter to be controlled by the currently selected slider.
Since each effect has as many as 8 different parameters, the maximum number
of settings available for this parameter will be 8: “Ef1prm1” through “Ef1prm8”
on the display, for example, stands for “effect 1 parameter 1” through “effect 1
parameter 8”. The parameters available for each effect are different, but the
name of the selected parameter will be shown between the parentheses on the
top line of the display. Parameters that can not be assigned to the sliders are
indicated by dashes (“--------”) instead of a parameter name.
Min (Minimum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the lower limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of “0”,
for example, means that when the slider is set to its lowest position the assigned parameter will also be set to its lowest value. A setting of “50” means
that the lowest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about 50% of
its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be set to
about 63).
If a controller is assigned to the “Min” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
45
Max (Maximum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the upper limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of
“100”, for example, means that when the slider is set to its highest position the
assigned parameter will also be set to its highest value. A setting of “80”
means that the highest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about
80% of its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be
set to about 102).
If a controller is assigned to the “Max” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
Additional (Additional MIDI control)
Range: 000 … 120, AfterTch, Velocity, KeyScale, LFO
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter allows MIDI control change numbers to be assigned to the
selected effect parameters, so that they can be controlled from the SY85 controllers (modulation wheel, foot controller, etc) or an external MIDI device that
is capable of transmitting control change messages. Additional settings include
“AfterTch” for keyboard aftertouch control, “Velocity” for keyboard velocity
control, “KeyScale” for key scaling control, and “LFO” for internal LFO control. This is in addition to control via the [CS1] and [CS2] sliders. MIDI control change numbers 000 through 120 can be assigned. Some control change
numbers are already defined, while others are not assigned to any specific
controller (see chart below).
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE NUMBER/DEVICE
0:
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
10:
11:
64:
65:
66:
67:
69:
46
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
“--------”
“Mod.Whl.”
“Breath C”
“Foot Cnt”
“Porta.Tm”
“Data Ent”
“Main Vol”
“Balance ”
“Panpot ”
“Express.”
“Hold 1 ”
“Porta.Sw”
“Sostenut”
“Soft
”
“Hold 2 ”
EFFECT EDIT
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
121:
122:
123:
124:
“Effect D”
“TremoloD”
“Chorus D”
“CelesteD”
“Phaser D”
“Inc.
”
“Dec.
”
“NRPN LSB”
“NRPN MSB”
“RPN LSB”
“RPN MSB”
“AfterTch”
“Velocity”
“KeyScale”
“LFO
”
10: CONTROL LFO
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 10:Control LFO → [ENTER/YES]
All of the modulation-type effects — chorus, flanging, etc. — require LFO control. The SY85 has an independent effect LFO that is set up by the following parameters.
EF`CTRL`LFO``Waveform````Speed````Delay`
``````````````∆˚∆`tri````````0````````0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Wave (LFO waveform)
Range: tri, dwn, up, squ, sin, S/H, 1tm
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the waveform of the effect LFO.
“tri” = Triangle.
“up” = Upward sawtooth.
“sin” = Sine.
“dwn” = Downward sawtooth.
“squ” = Square.
“S/H” = Sample and hold.
“1tm” = Upward 1-shot.
If a controller is assigned to the “Wave” parameter (page 45), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Speed (LFO speed)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the speed of the effect LFO.
“0” is the slowest speed setting, producing an LFO speed of approximately
0 Hertz. The fastest setting of 99 produces an LFO speed of approximately 25
Hertz.
If a controller is assigned to the “Speed” parameter (page 45), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Delay
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the delay time between the beginning of a note and the beginning of
effect LFO operation for the selected element.
The minimum setting “0” results in no delay, while the maximum setting of
“99” produces a delay of approximately 2.66 seconds before the effect LFO
begins operation.
If a controller is assigned to the “Delay” parameter (page 45), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
47
EFFECT DATA COPY
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [COPY]
This function facilitates performance effect editing by allowing the effect parameters from any other song, voice, or performance combination to be copied to the
current performance combination. You can copy an effect setup that is close to the
type you want, then edit it to produce the required sound.
EFFECT`COPY`````From
````````````````PFM``¡A1:InitPerf```````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From
Range: Any song, voice or performance combination
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY keys to
select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected. Use the
GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM keys to
select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry controls
can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
EFFECT`COPY`````From
Are`you`sure`?``PFM``¡A1:InitPerf
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the effect data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
effect edit mode.
48
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
EFFECT SIGNAL FLOW DISPLAY
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [SHIFT] + [F1] ~ [F3]
This function provides a graphic indication of the current effect system configuration while in the effect edit mode.
● Overall Effect Flow
EFFECT`FLOW`Ú`∏Á∏∏∏∏∏∏
Î`Ú`EF1=Rev.Stage1
`Mode=`para`Ú`ØØØØØËÔÁ `Ú`EF2=EQ`->`Sym
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 1 Configuration
EF1`Send1a>---[Stge˜]------------◊ ->OUT1
`````````````````````````````````’-<DRY1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 2 Configuration
EF2`Send2a>---[EQ```]-Ÿ-[Sym`˜]--◊ ->OUT2
````Send2b>-----------Û``````````’-<DRY2
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [SHIFT] + [F1] to see the overall effect system signal flow. Press [SHIFT]
+ [F2] to see the effect 1 section configuration, and [SHIFT] + [F3] for the effect 2
section configuration.
Refer the to section beginning on page 254 for details on the effect system.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
49
1: LAYER CONTROLLER SYNC
[PERFORMANCE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 1:Layer Controller Sync → [ENTER/YES]
This function changes the controller parameters of all voices in the selected
perfomance combination to match those of the voice assigned to the specified
“source” layer.
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Layer`Controller`Sync```
``````````````````````````Source`LayerA
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use the [CS8] slider to select the source layer (A, B, C, or D) from which
the controller data is to be copied, then press [ENTER/YES] to begin the layer
controller sync procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Layer`Controller`Sync
Are`you`sure`?````````````Source`LayerA
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
operation (which will overwrite all controller data for the voices assigned to all
layers other than the source layer), or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been copied, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to
calling the layer controller sync function.
50
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
JOB
2: LAYER EXCHANGE
[PERFORMANCE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 2:Layer Exchange → [ENTER/YES]
This function can be used to eliminate the audible effects of slight note delays
that can occur in the performance play mode. The notes played by layers A, B, C,
and D are sounded in sequence in the performance play mode. Normally the delay is
so slight that it is not audible. If a voice with a sharp attack is assigned to one of the
later layers (C or D), however, the delay can “soften” the attack of the voice. The
problem can be overcome by using this function to exchange layers A and D, for
example, so that the voice with the strong attack is assigned to layer A instead of
layer D. Since layer A is sounded first, the sharpness of the attack will be retained.
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Layer`Exchange
`````````````````````````````````A`†¥`A
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use the [CS7] and [CS8] sliders to select the layers to be exchanged (A
through D), then press [ENTER/YES] to begin the layer exchange procedure.
The following confirmation display will appear:
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Layer`Exchange
Are`you`sure`?```````````````````A`†¥`A
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
layer exchange operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been exchanged, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to
calling the layer exchange function.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
JOB
51
3: PERFORMANCE EDIT RECALL
[PERFORMANCE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 3:Recall → [ENTER/YES]
If you’re dissatisfied with the results of edits you’ve made to a performance
combination, or have accidentally lost track of changes made, use the PERFORMANCE EDIT RECALL function to recall the pre-edit performance data from the
SY85’s backup buffer memory.
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Recall````````<InitPerf>
``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the recall procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Recall````````<InitPerf>
Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
recall operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/NO]
to cancel.
When the original voice data has been recalled, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to calling the performance edit recall function.
52
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
JOB
4: PERFORMANCE INITIALIZE
[PERFORMANCE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 4:Initialize → [ENTER/YES]
When you want to program a totally new performance combination “from
scratch,” rather than editing an existing combination, use this function to initialize all
performance parameters.
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Initialize``
`````````````````````````[EDIT]`LYR
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [F6] if you want to initialize the entire performance combination
currently in the edit buffer, or [F7] if you only want to initialize one specific
layer. If you choose [F7], use the [CS8] slider to select the layer you want to
initialize.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the initialize procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
PERFORMANCE`JOB`Initialize
Are`you`sure`?```````````[EDIT]`LYR
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
initialize operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel.
When the performance data has been initialized, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to calling the performance initialize function.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
JOB
53
PERFORMANCE COMPARE
[SHIFT] + [STORE]
The performance compare function makes it possible to compare the sound of a
performance combination being edited with the same performance combination prior
to editing.
The illustrations here are not available.
To temporarily recall the original performance data while editing, press the
[STORE] key while holding the [SHIFT] key. The [PERFORMANCE] LED will
flash, indicating that the compare mode is engaged. Although you can select different
edit mode display screens, data cannot be edited in the compare mode. Press [EXIT/
NO] to return to the edit mode and the performance combination being edited.
54
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
COMPARE
PERFORMANCE STORE
[STORE]
When you’re satsfied with a new performance combination you’ve created in the
performance edit mode, use the store function described below to store the new
performance combination to an internal or card memory location.
PERFORMANCE`STORE`````Layer-:<-------->
``To``¡A1:InitPerf```¡A1u`¡A1u`¡A1u`¡A1u
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
When you’ve finished editing, return to the normal performance play mode
(press the [PERFORMANCE] key), and before selecting a different mode or
performance combination press the [STORE] key. You can now use the
MEMORY, GROUP, and NUMBER keys (or the [CS2] slider) to select the
memory location to which your new performance combination is to be stored.
Since any changes you have made via the LAYER VOICE EDIT MENU
(page 26) will be stored as voice data, it is also possible to specify the voice
memory loactions to which the voice data from each layer will be stored. The
[F5], [F6], [F7], and [F8] function keys select the layer A, B, C, and D layer
voices, respectively. The corresponding layer and voice name appears on the
upper display line. With the cursor in the appropriate position you can use the
MEMORY, GROUP, and NUMBER keys (or the corresponding slider) to select
the memory location to which each voice is to be stored. A “u” appearing next
to one of these voice numbers means that the voice is currently used by another performance combination, and therefore any changes to that voice will
affect the performance combination in which it is used. For more information
press the [SHIFT] key for a list of names of other performance combinations
that use the voices assigned to each layer.
Once the store location has been specified, press [ENTER/YES] to begin
the store procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
PERFORMANCE`STORE`````````Are`you`sure`?
``To``¡A1:InitPerf```¡A1u`¡A1u`¡A1u`¡A1u
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
store operation (which will erase all previous data in the specified memory
location), or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the performance data has been stored, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to calling the store function.
PERFORMANCE EDIT MODE /
STORE
55
VOICE EDIT MODE
OSCILLATOR
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Oscillator → [ENTER/YES]
This screen contains 6 parameters that determine the fundamental sound of the
voice being edited — including the number of the waveform on which the voice will
be based.
OSC``Wave``````Mode`Fine`Note`Rndm``Rvs`
P244`Sin```````norm```+0```+0````0``off`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Wave
Range: P001 … P244, I00 … I63, C00 … C63
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the wave (AWM waveform) to be used in the current voice. Use the
[INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] keys to select the memory area
from which the wave is to be selected. Please note that when SIMM memory is
wave memory installed, wave data can not be loaded into memory from a
waveform card. A complete listing of the internal waves is given in the Appendix, on page 310.
Mode
Range: fix, norm
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the selected wave is reproduced in the normal (variable
pitch) or fixed-pitch mode.
Normally you want the pitch of the AWM wave (or waves) used in a voice
to be controllable from a keyboard or other type of controller, in which case
the “norm” mode should be selected. In some cases — sound effects in particular — you might want the same pitch to be produced no matter what note you
play on the keyboard or other controller. In this case, the “fix” mode is appropriate. The Note parameter described below can be used to set the note produced when the “fix” mode is selected.
Fine
Range: -63 … 0 … +63
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Allows fine tuning of the selected AWM wave. Each increment corresponds
to approximately 1.17 cents (a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone) so the lowest
setting (-63) shifts the pitch down by almost three quarters of a semitone, while
the highest setting (+63) shifts the pitch up by the same amount. A setting of
“+0” produces standard concert pitch (A3 = 440 Hertz).
58
VOICE EDIT MODE /
1:Oscillator
Please note that this parameter is used to individually tune the current
voice. Overall tuning control is provided by the MASTER TUNE function
available in the UTILITY mode.
Note
Range: C-2 … G8, -64 … +63
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
When the “fix” mode is selected this parameters sets the frequency (note) at
which the selected wave will be played. The C-2 to G8 range of this parameter
covers a full 10-1/2 octaves. “C3” corresponds to “middle C” on a keyboard.
When the “norm” mode is selected, this parameter is used to shift the
overall pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone increments (i.e. a
“note shift” function). In this case the range of the parameters is from -64
through 0 to +63. A setting of “-12,” for example, shifts the pitch down by one
octave; a setting of “+4” shifts the pitch up by a major third.
Rndm (Random pitch)
Range: 0 … 7
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the amount of random pitch variation produced each time a note is
played.
When this parameter is set to a value other than “0,” the pitch changes
randomly each time a note is played. The random pitch change is applied
independently to each note in a chord. A setting of “7” produces the greatest
amount of random pitch change.
This function is ideal for simulating the sound of instruments like the
clavichord, string sections or other ensembles in which the pitch of each note is
rarely in perfect tune with the others.
Rvs (Reverse)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
When this parameter is turned “on,” the selected wave is played in reverse.
When Rvs is “on,” the pitch EG “Loop” parameter described on page 75 is
automatically turned “off.”
VOICE EDIT MODE /
1:Oscillator
59
1: AEG LEVEL & RATE
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Amlitude EG → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 1:Level&Rate → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85’s main AEG (Amplitude Envelope generator) has five individually
programmable rates and two levels for exceptional envelope programming flexibility.
Next to the fundamental waveform used, the amplitude envelope is one of the most
important factors determining the overall sound of a voice.
AEG````R1```R2```L2```R3```L3```R4```RR`
`atk``π 63`ƒ`63````0`π `63```63`ƒ``0`π `50π
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Atk/Hld (Amplitude EG attack/hold mode)
Range: atk, hold
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
The “Atk” and “Hld” mode settings affect the initial attack of the sound,
determining how the amplitude envelope begins. In the “Atk” mode, the envelope begins from zero level, reaching the maximum AWM level at a rate determined by the R1 (Rate 1) parameter. In this mode there will always be a slight
delay between the initiation of a note and maximum level.
R1 … RR, L2 … L3 (Rates & levels)
Range: 0 … 63
Controls: [CS2] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
The following diagrams illustrate how the AEG rate and level parameters
determine the overall shape of the amplitude envelope.
● “Atk” Mode
The illustrations here are not available.
60
VOICE EDIT MODE /
2:Amplitude EG
The envelope begins at zero level, reaches maximum level at the rate determined by the R1 parameter, moves to L2 (Level 2) at R2 (Rate 2), moves on
to L3 (Level 3) at R3 (Rate 3), and finally decays to zero level at R4 (Rate 4)
if the note is held the entire time.
If the note is released before the end of the envelope described above, then
the sound decays to zero level from the point at which the note is released at
the rate determined by the RR (Release Rate) parameter.
The illustrations here are not available.
● “Hld” Mode
If the “hold” mode is selected, the envelope begins immediately from maximum AWM level, allowing the fast attack transients of waveforms to pass
unaffected. In this case the R1 parameter is replaced by the HT (Hold Time)
parameter. The HT parameter determines the length of time between the beginning of the envelope and the point at which the envelope begins to move
towards L2 (Level 2) at R2 (Rate 2), as shown below.
The illustrations here are not available.
For the level parameters, a setting of “0” corresponds to the lowest possible
level (no sound) while a setting of 63 produces the highest output level. A “0”
rate parameter setting produces the slowest rate between levels, while the
maximum setting of “63” produces the fastest (almost instantaneous) change.
VOICE EDIT MOD E /
2:Amplitude EG
61
2: LEVEL SCALING
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Amlitude EG → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 2:Level Scaling → [ENTER/YES]
Level scaling produces natural level variations across the range of the keyboard
by allowing different level “offset” values to be applied to each of four “breakpoints”
set at appropriate keys.
LEVEL`SCALING`)POINT1`(`````````````````
``C1```G2```E4```F4```+0```+0```+0```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Point 1 … 4
Range: C-2 ... G8
Controls: [CS1] … [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial, [SHIFT] + Keyboard
Allows four separate amplitude envelope generator level-scaling breakpoints
to be set at any notes between C-2 and G8 for the selected element.
To use the keyboard for breakpoint entry, simply select a breakpoint parameter by pressing the coresponding function key or moving the corresponding
continuous slider, then press the key at which you want to set the breakpoint
while holding the [SHIFT] key.
No breakpoint can be set to a key lower than the breakpoint to its left.
Offset 1 … 4
Range: -127 ... +127
Controls: [CS5] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the amount of level offset for each of the four level-scaling breakpoints set by the “Point” parameters described above.
Negative values reduce the level, and positive values increase the level at
the corresponding breakpoint. No matter what value is chosen, the EG level
will never exceed its minimum or maximum levels. When different offset
values are applied to adjacent breakpoints, the level varies smoothly between
the breakpoints.
62
VOICE EDIT MODE /
2:Amplitude EG
3: SENSITIVITY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Amlitude EG → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 3:Sensitivity → [ENTER/YES]
The parameters provided here determine how the amplitude envelope generator
responds to changes in keyboard velocity and range.
AMP```Vel```AtkRateVel`````RateScaling``
Sens.``+0````````-7`````````````+0``````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Vel (Velocity sensitivity)
Range: -7 ... +7
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the output level of the current voice changes in response to
velocity changes (e.g. keyboard dynamics).
Plus “+” settings produce higher output level in response to higher velocity
values — i.e. the harder a key is played, the louder the sound. The maximum
setting of “+7” produces the maximum level variation in response to velocity
changes. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect: lower level in response
to higher velocity. A setting of “+0” results in no level variation.
AtkRateVel (Attack rate velocity sensitivity)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how key velocity (keyboard dynamics) affect the attack time of
the amplitude envelope generator.
Plus (“+”) settings produce an increase in attack time in proportion to key
velocity, while minus (“-”) settings produce a decrease in attack time in proportion to key velocity. The greater the value the greater the change in envelope
length.
RateScaling
Range: -7 ... +7
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Allows the overall amplitude envelope generator decay rate for the selected
element to be varied across the entire pitch range.
Plus (“+”) settings produce a longer overall envelope time for the low notes
and a shorter envelope time for the high notes. This is useful for simulating
instruments such as piano, in which the low notes take much longer to decay
than the high notes. The maximum “+7” setting produces the greatest envelope
length variation across the pitch range. Minus (“-”) settings produce the opposite effect — short low notes and long high notes. A setting of “+0” results in
no envelope length variation.
VOICE EDIT MOD E /
2:Amplitude EG
63
AEG DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Amplitude EG → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] → [COPY]
This function facilitates voice editing by allowing the amplitude EG data from
any other voice (the “source” voice) to be copied to the current voice. You can copy
an envelope that is close to the type you want, then edit it to produce the required
sound.
AEG`COPY````````From`Voice``````````````
`````````````````````¡A1:InitVce
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Voice
Range: Any INTERNAL or CARD voice
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY keys to
select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected. Use the
GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM keys to
select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry controls
can also be used to select the source voice bank and number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
AEG`COPY````````From`Voice``````````````
Are`you`sure`?```````¡A1:InitVce
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the AEG data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
amplitude EG edit mode.
64
VOICE EDIT MODE /
2:Amplitude EG
1:TYPE, CUTOFF FREQUENCY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Filter → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 1:Cutoff Frequency → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a sophisticated digital filter system that can be used to shape
the timbre of the voice being edited in a number of ways. Changes in the response
and cutoff frequency can be used to define the basic timbre of the voice, while EGcontrolled filter sweeps can produce a virtually unlimited range of time-based timbre
variations.
FILTER`Cutoff`Freq.`Type`Band`Reso`CTRL`
`````(------Hz)`---`THRU``---```--``LFO`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Cutoff Freq. (Cutoff frequency)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the cutoff frequency of the selected filter.
Lower cutoff values produce a lower cutoff frequency and higher values
produce a higher cutoff frequency.
The illustrations here are not available.
With an LPF response (selected by the “Type” parameter, below), a lower
cutoff frequency reduces the range of high frequencies passed, making the
sound “darker” or “rounder.”
With a HPF response, a higher cutoff frequency reduces the range of low
frequencies passed, making the sound “thinner” or “sharper.”
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
65
Type (Filter type)
Range: THRU, LPF, LPF12, HPF, BPF, BEF
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the type of filter response used.
The “THRU” (THROUGH) setting turns the filter OFF.
● “LPF” and “LPF12” Types
The “LPF” (Low Pass Filter) and “LPF12” settings produces a filter response that allows only frequencies below the cutoff frequency (See “Cutoff”
above) to pass. The “LPF” filter type has a steep 24-dB/octave cutoff slope,
while the “LPF12” type has a gentler 12-dB/octave slope.
The illustrations here are not available.
● “HPF” Type
The “HPF” (High Pass Filter) setting produces a filter response that allows
only frequencies above the cutoff frequency (See “Cutoff” above) to pass.
The illustrations here are not available.
66
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
● “BPF” Type
The “BPF” (Band Pass Filter) setting produces a filter response that allows
only a band of frequencies centered at the cutoff frequency (See “Cutoff”
above) to pass. The “Band” parameter (below) determines the width of the pass
band.
The illustrations here are not available.
● “BEF” Type
The “BEF” (Band Elimination Filter) setting produces a filter response that
eliminates a band of frequencies centered at the cutoff frequency (See “Cutoff”
above) to pass. The “Band” parameter (below) determines the width of the
elimination band.
The illustrations here are not available.
Band (BPF & BEF bandwidth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determeines the width of the frequency pass or elimination band for the
BPF and BEF filter types, respectively. The minimum setting of “0” produces
an extremely narrow pass or elimination band, while the maximum setting of
“127” produces a wide band.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
67
Reso (Resonance)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the degree of filter resonance when the “LPF” filter type is
selected (“--” appears in place of the resonance parameter when any other filter
type is selected).
This parameter has a similar effect to the “resonance” settings on traditional
analog synthesizer filters — i.e. it determines the height of a peak in the filter
response at the cutoff frequency.
The illustrations here are not available.
Higher resonance values produce a higher resonant peak and reduce the
overall bandwidth of the filter, passing a narrow band of frequencies at the
filter’s cutoff.
CTRL (Filter control)
Range: EG, LFO
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the cutoff frequency of the selected filter will be controlled by the LFO or by the filter envelope generator (EG).
Varying the filter cutoff frequency can create “sweep” or “wah-wah” type
effects. If the cutoff is controlled via the LFO a cyclic variation based on the
“shape” of the selected LFO waveform is produced. If EG control is selected,
the filter envelope generator (see “FILTER EG LEVEL & RATE” below) can
be set up to produce a wide range of time-based variations.
Please note that if “LFO” is selected, the filter cutoff envelope generator
parameters have no effect on the sound.
68
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
2: CUTOFF SCALING
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Filter → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 2:Cutoff Scaling → [ENTER/YES]
Cutoff scaling produces natural timbre variations across the range of the keyboard
by allowing different filter cutoff frequency “offset” values to be applied to each of
four “breakpoints” set at appropriate keys.
CUTOFF`SCALING``````)POINT1`(```````````
``C1```G2```E4```F4```+0```+0```+0```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
POINT 1 … 4
Range: C-2 ... G8
Controls: [CS1] … [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial, [SHIFT] + Keyboard
Allows four separate cutoff envelope generator level-scaling breakpoints to
be set at any notes between C-2 and G8 for the selected filter.
To use the keyboard for breakpoint entry, simply select a breakpoint parameter by pressing the coresponding function key or moving the corresponding
continuous slider, then press the key at which you want to set the breakpoint
while holding the [SHIFT] key.
No breakpoint can be set to a key lower than the breakpoint to its left.
OFFSET 1 … 4
Range: -127 ... +127
Controls: [CS5] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the amount of level offset for each of the four level-scaling breakpoints set by the “Point” parameter described above.
Negative values lower the cutoff frequency, and positive values increase the
cutoff frequency at the corresponding breakpoint. No matter what value is
chosen, the cutoff frequency will never exceed its minimum or maximum value.
When different offset values are applied to adjacent breakpoints, the cutoff
frequency varies smoothly between the breakpoints.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
69
3: FEG LEVEL & RATE
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Filter → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 3:FEG Level&Rate → [ENTER/YES]
The filter envelope generator is entirely separate from the amplitude EG, and is
used specifically to create time-based timbre variations. It can be used to simulate the
natural timbre variations produced by acoustic instruments, or to create more pronounced electronic effects.
FEG````L0`π `L1`π `L2```L3`π `L4`π RL1`π RL2π
[LVL]``+0```+0``-63`ƒ`+0```+0```+0```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
FEG````RS`π `R1`π `R2```R3`π `R4`π RR1`π RR2π
[RATE]`+0````0````0`ƒ``0````0````0````0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
LVL/RATE (Level/Rate switch)
Range: LVL, RATE
Controls: [F1]
This “switch” determines whether the level parameters (L0 … L4, RL1, and
RL2) or the rate parameters (RS, R1 … R4, RR1, and RR2), described below,
are selected for editing.
L0 … L4, RL1, RL2 (Levels 0 … 4, Release levels 1 & 2)
Range: -63 ... +63
Controls: [CS2] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters are available when the Level/Rate switch parameter is set
to “LVL”.
The level parameters work in conjunction with the rate parameters described
below to determine the “shape” of the cutoff envelope generator for the selected filter. This function is only available if the “CTRL” parameter (page 68)
is set to “EG.”
The cutoff envelope generator level parameters correspond to cutoff frequency. Plus “+” values produce higher cutoff frequencies while minus “-”
70
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
values produce lower cutoff frequencies. “0” level values produce the normal
cutoff frequency as determined by the cutoff parameter (See “Cutoff” on page
65).
RS (Rate scaling)
Range: -7 ... +7
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Allows the overall cutoff envelope generator rate for the selected filter to
be varied across the entire pitch range (i.e. keyboard range). This function is
only available if the “CTRL” parameter (page 68) is set to “EG.”
Plus (“+”) settings produce a longer overall envelope time for the low notes
and a shorter envelope time for the high notes. The maximum “+7” setting
produces the greatest envelope length variation across the pitch range. Minus
(“-”) settings produce the opposite effect — a shorter low-note envelope and
longer high-note envelope. A setting of “+0” results in no envelope length
variation.
R1 … R4, RR1, RR2 (Rates 1 … 4, Release rates 1 & 2)
Range: 0 … 63
Controls: [CS3] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters work in conjunction with the level parameters described
above to determine the “shape” of the cutoff envelope generator for the selected filter. This function is only available if the “CTRL” parameter (page 68)
is set to “EG.”
The “Rate” parameters work in the same way as the amplitude and pitch
envelope generator rate parameters: a setting of “63” produces the fastest (almost instantaneous) rate between levels, while the minimum setting of “0”
produces the slowest change.
The filter envelope begins at L0 (Level 0), moves to L1 (Level 1) at a rate
determined by the setting of R1, then to L2 (Level 2) at R2 (Rate 2), then to
L3 (Level 3) at R3 (Rate 3), and then to L4 (Level 4) at R4 (Rate 4). The
cutoff stays at L4 until the key is released, and then moves to RL1 (Release
Level 1) at the rate determined by RR1 (Release Rate 1), and finally to RL2
(Release Level 2) at RR2 (Release Rate 2).
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
71
4: FILTER SENSITIVITY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Filter → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 4:Filter Sensitivity → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determine how the filter envelope generator is affected by
keyboard dynamics.
FILTER`SENS.```Type``Vel`````AtkRateVel`
```````````EG»attack``+0`````````````+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Type (Velocity sensitivity type)
Range: EG_attack, EG_shift
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether changes in key velocity (keyboard dynamics) affect the
attack level of the filter EG or its cutoff frequency. When set to “EG_attack”,
velocity affects filter EG attack level, and when set to “EG_shift”, velocity
affects the filter cutoff frequency.
Vel (Velocity sensitivity)
Range: -63 ... +63
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the filter cutoff frequency changes in response to velocity
changes (e.g. keyboard dynamics).
Plus “+” settings produce higher cutoff frequencies in response to higher
velocity values — i.e. the harder a key is played, the higher the cutoff frequency. The maximum setting of “+63” produces the maximum level variation
in response to velocity changes. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect:
lower cutoff in response to higher velocity. A setting of “+0” results in no
cutoff variation.
AtkRateVel (Attack rate velocity sensitivity)
Range: -63 ... +63
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how key velocity (keyboard dynamics) affect the attack portion
of the filter EG envelope.
Plus (“+”) settings produce an increase in attack time in proportion to key
velocity, while minus (“-”) settings produce a decrease in attack time in proportion to key velocity. The greater the value the greater the change in attack
time.
72
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
FILTER DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Filter → [ENTER/YES]→ [ENTER/YES]→ [COPY]
This function facilitates voice editing by allowing the filter parameters from any
other voice (the “source” voice) to be copied to the current voice. You can copy a
filter setup that is close to the type you want, then edit it to produce the required
sound.
FILTER`COPY`````From`Voice``````````````
`````````````````````¡A1:InitVce
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Voice
Range: Any INTERNAL or CARD voice
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY keys to
select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected. Use the
GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM keys to
select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry controls
can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
FILTER`COPY`````From`Voice``````````````
Are`you`sure`?```````¡A1:InitVce
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the filter data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
filter edit mode.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
3:Filter
73
1: LEVEL & RATE
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Pitch EG → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 1:Level&Rate → [ENTER/YES]
In addition to the amplitude and filter envelope generators, the SY85 has an
independent pitch EG that can be used to produce subtle or pronounced time-based
pitch variations. The pitch EG has 5 programmable levels and 4 rates for extended
flexibility.
PEG`````````L0`π `L1```L2`π `L3`π RL1`π ````
[LEVEL]`````+0``-63`ƒ`+0```+0```+0``````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
PEG```````Loop`π `R1```R2`π `R3`π `RR`π `RS`
[RATE`]````off````0`ƒ`63```63```63```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Level/Rate
Range: LEVEL, RATE
Controls: [F1]
This “switch” determines whether the level parameters (L0 … L3, RL1) or
the rate parameters (Loop, R1 … R3, RR, and RS), described below, are
selected for editing.
L0 … L3, RL1 (Levels 0 … 3, release level 1)
Range: -63 ... +63
Controls: [CS3] … [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters work in conjunction with the rate parameters described
below to determine the “shape” of the pitch envelope generator for the selected
element.
Unlike the amplitude envelope generator, the “Level” parameters of which
actually correspond to volume levels, the pitch envelope generator level parameters correspond to pitch. Plus “+” values produce higher pitch while minus “-”
values produce lower pitch. “0” level values produce normal pitch.
74
VOICE EDIT MODE /
4:Pitch EG
Loop
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
When the Loop parameter is set to “on” the pitch EG cycle repeats from
the beginning (L0) to the L3 level until the keys being played are released.
When set to “off,” the L3 level is maintained until the keys being played are
released.
R1 … R3, RR (Rates 1 … 3, release rate)
Range: 0 ... +63
Controls: [CS4] … [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters work in conjunction with the level parameters described
above to determine the “shape” of the pitch envelope generator for the selected
element.
The “Rate” parameters work in the same way as the amplitude envelope
generator rate parameters: a setting of “63” produces the fastest (almost instantaneous) rate between levels, while the minimum setting of “0” produces the
slowest change.
The pitch envelope begins at L0 (Level 0), moves to L1 (Level 1) at a rate
determined by the setting of R1, then to L2 (Level 2) at R2 (Rate 2), and then
to L3 (Level 3) at R3 (Rate 3). The pitch stays at L3 until the key is released,
and then moves to RL1 (Release Level 1) at the rate determined by RR (Release Rate).
The illustrations here are not available.
RS (Pitch EG rate scaling)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Allows the overall pitch envelope generator rate for the selected element to
be varied across the entire pitch range.
Plus (“+”) settings produce a longer overall envelope time for the low notes
and a shorter envelope time for the high notes. The maximum “+7” setting
produces the greatest envelope length variation across the pitch range. Minus
(“-”) settings produce the opposite effect — a shorter low-note envelope and
longer high-note envelope. A setting of “+0” results in no envelope length
variation.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
4:Pitch EG
75
2: RANGE, SENSITIVITY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Pitch EG → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 2:Sensitivity → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determined the overall range of the pitch EG, and how it is
affected by variations in keyboard velocity.
PEG`SENS.``Range`````Vel`RateVel````````
`````````````1oct`````+0```+0``````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Range
Range: 1/8oct, 1/2oct, 1oct, 2oct
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum range of pitch envelope generator pitch variation.
This parameter determines the total maximum range of the pitch envelope
generator, so a setting of “2oct” means that the maximum range is ±1 octave.
That is, if a level parameter is set to +63, for example, the pitch at that point
will be one octave above normal pitch.
Vel (Pitch EG velocity sensitivity)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the overall envelope depth of the pitch envelope generator
is controlled by velocity information.
Plus (“+”) values produce a deeper pitch envelope in response to higher
velocity, while minus (“-”) values produce a shallower pitch envelope in response to higher velocity values. The greater the value the greater the change
in pitch envelope depth.
RateVel (Pitch EG rate velocity sensitivity)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the overall envelope length of the pitch envelope generator
is controlled by velocity information.
Plus (“+”) values produce a longer pitch envelope in response to higher
velocity, while minus (“-”) values produce a shorter pitch envelope in response
to higher velocity values. The greater the value the greater the change in pitch
envelope length.
76
VOICE EDIT MODE /
4:Pitch EG
PITCH EG DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Pitch EG → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] → [COPY]
This function facilitates voice editing by allowing the pitch EG parameters from
any other voice (the “source” voice) to be copied to the current voice. You can copy
a pitch EG setup that is close to the type you want, then edit it to produce the required sound.
PEG`COPY````````From`Voice``````````````
`````````````````````¡A1:InitVce
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Voice
Range: Any INTERNAL or CARD voice
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY keys to
select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected. Use the
GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM keys to
select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry controls
can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
PEG`COPY````````From`Voice``````````````
Are`you`sure`?```````¡A1:InitVce
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the pitch EG data, or press
[EXIT/NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished,
“Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to
the pitch EG edit mode.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
4:Pitch EG
77
1: LFO
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:LFO → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 1:LFO → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters define the operation of the SY85’s main LFO (Low Frequency
Oscillator). The main LFO controls amplitude, pitch, frequency, and filter cutoff
modulation applied via the modulation wheel, the foot controller, and keyboard
aftertouch response.
LFO``Wave`Sped`Pmod`Amod`Fmod`Dely`Phase
`∆˚∆``tri```64````0````0````0````0````0±
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Wave (LFO waveform)
Range: tri, dwn, up, squ, sin, S/H
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the waveform of the LFO.
“tri” = Triangle.
“up” = Upward sawtooth.
“sin” = Sine.
“dwn” = Downward sawtooth.
“squ” = Square.
“S/H” = Sample and hold.
Sped (LFO speed)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the speed of the LFO.
“0” is the slowest Speed setting, producing an LFO speed of approximately
0 Hertz. The fastest setting of 99 produces an LFO speed of approximately 25
Hertz.
Pmod (Pitch modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum amount of pitch modulation that can be applied to the
current voice.
A “0” setting produces no modulation while a setting of “127” produces
maximum modulation. Pitch modulation produces a periodic pitch variation,
thereby creating a vibrato effect.
Please note that the pitch modulation depth parameter for the controller
which is to be used to apply pitch modulation (see page 83, 85, and 87) must
also be set to an appropriate value before pitch modulation can be applied.
78
VOICE EDIT MODE /
5:LFO
Amod (Amplitude modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum amount of amplitude modulation that can be applied to
the current voice.
A “0” setting produces no modulation while a setting of “127” produces
maximum modulation. Amplitude modulation produces a periodic variation in
the volume of the sound, thus creating a tremolo effect.
Please note that the amplitude modulation depth parameter for the controller
which is to be used to apply amplitude modulation (see page 83, 85, and 87)
must also be set to an appropriate value before amplitude modulation can be
applied.
Fmod (Filter cutoff frequency modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum amount of filter cuttoff modulation that can be applied
to the current voice.
A “0” setting produces no modulation while a setting of “127” produces
maximum modulation. Filter cutoff modulation produces wah-wah type effects.
Please note that the filter cutoff modulation depth parameter for the controller which is to be used to apply cutoff modulation (see page 84, 86, and 88)
must also be set to an appropriate value before cutoff frequency modulation can
be applied.
Dely (Delay)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the delay time between the beginning of a note and the beginning of
LFO operation for the selected element.
The minimum setting “0” results in no delay, while the maximum setting of
“99” produces a delay of approximately 2.66 seconds before the LFO begins
operation (5.3 seconds before it reaches maximum depth).
Phase
Range: 0 … 180
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines at which point in the LFO waveform the LFO will begin operation for the selected element. The values 0 through 180 correspond to phase
angles in degrees. The illustration below shows how the various phase angles
correspond to points on the LFO waveform (a sine wave is used for clarity).
VOICE EDIT MODE /
5:LFO
79
2: LFO SPEED SENSITIVITY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:LFO → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 2:LFO Speed Sensitivity → [ENTER/YES]
The speed of the SY85 LFO can be varied randomly, and according to variations
in keyboard velocity and range. Such variations can produce more natural, musical
effects.
LFO`SPEED`SENS.`Random`Velocity`KeyScale
``````````````````0````````+0````````+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Random
Range: 0 … 7
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the amount of random LFO speed variation produced each time a note
is played.
When this parameter is set to a value other than “0,” the LFO speed
changes randomly each time a note is played. A setting of “7” produces the
greatest amount of random speed change.
Velocity
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the LFO speed changes in response to velocity changes
(e.g. keyboard dynamics).
Plus “+” settings produce higher LFO speed in response to higher velocity
values — i.e. the harder a key is played, the higher the LFO speed. The maximum setting of “+7” produces the maximum speed variation in response to
velocity changes. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect: lower speed in
response to higher velocity. A setting of “+0” results in no speed variation.
KeyScale
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the LFO speed changes in response to the key played.
Plus “+” settings produce higher LFO speed when higher notes on the
keyboard are played. The maximum setting of “+7” produces the maximum
speed variation. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect: lower speed
when higher notes are played. A setting of “+0” results in no speed variation.
80
VOICE EDIT MODE /
5:LFO
LFO DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:LFO → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] → [COPY]
This function facilitates voice editing by allowing the LFO parameters from any
other voice (the “source” voice) to be copied to the current voice. You can copy an
LFO setup that is close to the type you want, then edit it to produce the required
sound.
LFO`COPY````````From`Voice``````````````
`````````````````````¡A1:InitVce
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Voice
Range: Any INTERNAL or CARD voice
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY keys to
select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected. Use the
GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM keys to
select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry controls
can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
LFO`COPY````````From`Voice``````````````
Are`you`sure`?```````¡A1:InitVce
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the LFO data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
LFO edit mode.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
5:LFO
81
1: PITCH BEND RANGE
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Controller → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 1:Pitch Bend Range → [ENTER/YES]
This screen includes parameters that set the SY85’s pitch bend range, the minimum volume attainable with the foot volume controller, and the sustain switch enable/disable mode.
CTRL`````PB»Range`VolLowLimit``SustainSw
`````````````2`````````0````````enable``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
PB Range (Pitch bend range)
Range: 0 … 12
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum pitch bend range.
Each increment from “0” to “12” represents a semitone. A setting of “0”
produces no pitch bend. A setting of “12” allows a maximum pitch bend of
plus or minus one octave, while a setting of “4” allows a maximum pitch bend
of plus or minus a major third.
VolLoLimit (Minimum foot volume level)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the minimum volume level that can be set by the foot volume
control. If this parameter is set to “0,” the minimum foot volume control position will produce no sound. A setting of “63” will result in about half volume
when the control is set to its minimum position.
SustainSw (Sustain switch enable)
Range: enable, disable
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Enables or disables sustain footswitch operation. The sustain footswitch
operates normally when this parameter is set to “enable,” but has no effect
when set to “disable.”
82
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
2: MODULATION WHEEL DEPTH
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Controller → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 2:MW Depth → [ENTER/YES]
The modulation wheel can be used to control a wide range of modulation effects.
The parameters provided in this screen set the depth of each effect type.
CTRL`MW````````Amod`Pmod`Fmod`EGBs`Coff`
``````````````````0````0````0```+0```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Amod (Amplitude modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of amplitude modulation (tremolo effects) applied
via the modulation wheel.
A setting of “0” allows no amplitude modulation, while a setting of 127
results in maximum amplitude modulation depth.
When setting up the low-frequency oscillator to apply amplitude modulation, this parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if amplitude modulation is to be applied via the modulation wheel.
Pmod (Pitch modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of pitch modulation (vibrato effects) applied via
the modulation wheel.
A setting of “0” allows no pitch modulation, while a setting of 127 results
in maximum amplitude modulation.
When setting up the low-frequency oscillator to apply pitch modulation, this
parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if pitch modulation is to be
applied via the modulation wheel.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
83
Fmod (Frequency modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of filter cutoff frequency modulation (wah-wah
type effects) applied via the modulation wheel.
A setting of “0” allows no frequency modulation, while a setting of 127
results in maximum frequency modulation.
When setting up the LFO (low-frequency oscillator) to apply cutoff modulation, this parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if cutoff modulation
is to be applied via the modulation wheel. Also, the filter “CTRL” parameter
(page 68) must be set to “LFO” in order to vary the cutoff frequency continuously.
EGBs (EG bias depth)
Range: -127 … +127
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the depth and “direction” of EG bias produced by the modulation
wheel. EG bias increases or decreases the amplitude envelope generator levels,
simulating the dynamic variations that can be produced on an acoustic instrument more accurately than simple volume control.
A setting of “0” produces no change in EG levels. Plus (“+”) settings
produce an increase in level when the modulation wheel is rolled upward, and
minus (“-”) settings produce a decrease in level when when the modultion
wheel is rolled upward. The greater the value, the greater the change in level.
Coff (Cutoff frequency depth)
Range: -127 … +127
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of filter cutoff frequency variation applied via the
modulation wheel.
Plus “+” settings produce higher cutoff frequencies in response to modulation wheel operation — i.e. the higher the modulation wheel position, the
higher the cutoff frequency. The maximum setting of “+127” produces the
maximum cutoff variation. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect: lower
cutoff in response to higher modulation wheel positions. A setting of “+0”
results in no cutoff variation. The filter “CTRL” parameter (page 68) must be
set to “LFO” in order to vary the cutoff frequency continuously.
84
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
3: FOOT CONTROLLER DEPTH
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Controller → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 3:FC Depth → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 allows modulation control via a foot controller connected to th rearpanel FOOT CONTROLLER jack as well as the modulation wheel. This allows
modulation effects to be applied while playing with both hands. The parameters in
this screen set the depth of the foot controller modulation effects.
CTRL`FC````````Amod`Pmod`Fmod`EGBs`Coff`
``````````````````0````0````0```+0```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Amod (Amplitude modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of amplitude modulation (tremolo effects) applied
via the foot controller.
A setting of “0” allows no amplitude modulation, while a setting of 127
results in maximum amplitude modulation depth.
When setting up the low-frequency oscillator to apply amplitude modulation, this parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if amplitude modulation is to be applied via the foot controller.
Pmod (Pitch modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of pitch modulation (vibrato effects) applied via
the foot controller.
A setting of “0” allows no pitch modulation, while a setting of 127 results
in maximum amplitude modulation.
When setting up the low-frequency oscillator to apply pitch modulation, this
parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if pitch modulation is to be
applied via the foot controller.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
85
Fmod (Frequency modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of filter cutoff frequency modulation (wah-wah
type effects) applied via the foot controller.
A setting of “0” allows no frequency modulation, while a setting of 127
results in maximum frequency modulation.
When setting up the LFO (low-frequency oscillator) to apply cutoff modulation, this parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if cutoff modulation
is to be applied via the foot controller. Also, the filter “CTRL” parameter (page
68) must be set to “LFO” in order to vary the cutoff frequency continuously.
EGBs (EG bias depth)
Range: -127 … +127
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the depth and “direction” of EG bias produced by the foot controller.
EG bias increases or decreases the amplitude envelope generator levels, simulating the dynamic variations that can be produced on an acoustic instrument
more accurately than simple volume control.
A setting of “0” produces no change in EG levels. Plus (“+”) settings
produce an increase in level when the foot controller is applied, and minus (“”) settings produce a decrease in level when the foot controller is applied. The
greater the value, the greater the change in level.
Coff (Cutoff frequency depth)
Range: -127 … +127
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of filter cutoff frequency variation applied via the
foot controller.
Plus “+” settings produce higher cutoff frequencies in response to foot
controller operation — i.e. the more the foot controller is depressed, the higher
the cutoff frequency. The maximum setting of “+127” produces the maximum
cutoff variation. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect: lower cutoff in
response to higher foot controller positions. A setting of “+0” results in no
cutoff variation. The filter “CTRL” parameter (page 68) must be set to “LFO”
in order to vary the cutoff frequency continuously.
86
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
4: AFTER TOUCH DEPTH
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Controller → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 4:AT Depth → [ENTER/YES]
For truly “intimate” modulation control, the SY85 allows a number of modulation
effects to be controlled via keyboard aftertouch response. The parameters in this
screen set the depth of the aftertouch modulation effects.
CTRL`AT````Amod`Pmod`Fmod`EGBs`Coff`PtBs
``````````````0````0````0```+0```+0```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Amod (Amplitude modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of amplitude modulation (tremolo effects) applied
via keyboard aftertouch.
A setting of “0” allows no amplitude modulation, while a setting of 127
results in maximum amplitude modulation depth.
When setting up the low-frequency oscillator to apply amplitude modulation, this parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if amplitude modulation is to be applied via keyboard after touch.
Pmod (Pitch modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of pitch modulation (vibrato effects) applied via
keyboard aftertouch.
A setting of “0” allows no pitch modulation, while a setting of 127 results
in maximum amplitude modulation.
When setting up the low-frequency oscillator to apply pitch modulation, this
parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if pitch modulation is to be
applied via keyboard aftertouch.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
87
Fmod (Frequency modulation depth)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of filter cutoff frequency modulation (wah-wah
type effects) applied via keyboard aftertouch.
A setting of “0” allows no frequency modulation, while a setting of 127
results in maximum frequency modulation.
When setting up the LFO (low-frequency oscillator) to apply cutoff modulation, this parameter must be set to a value other than “0” if cutoff modulation
is to be applied via keyboard aftertouch. Also, the filter “CTRL” parameter
(page 68) must be set to “LFO” in order to vary the cutoff frequency continuously.
EGBs (EG bias depth)
Range: -127 … +127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the depth and “direction” of EG bias produced by aftertouch response.
EG bias increases or decreases the amplitude envelope generator levels, simulating the dynamic variations that can be produced on an acoustic instrument
more accurately than simple volume control.
A setting of “0” produces no change in EG levels. Plus (“+”) settings
produce an increase in level when aftertouch is applied, and minus (“-”) settings produce a decrease in level when aftertouch is applied. The greater the
value, the greater the change in level.
Coff (Cutoff frequency depth)
Range: -127 … +127
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum depth of filter cutoff frequency variation applied via
keyboard aftertouch.
Plus “+” settings produce higher cutoff frequencies in response to aftertouch
— i.e. the greater the aftertouch pressure, the higher the cutoff frequency. The
maximum setting of “+127” produces the maximum cutoff variation. Minus “-”
settings produce the opposite effect: lower cutoff in response to greater
aftertouch pressure. A setting of “+0” results in no cutoff variation. The filter
“CTRL” parameter (page 68) must be set to “LFO” in order to vary the cutoff
frequency continuously.
PtBs (Pitch bias depth)
Range: -12 … +12
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum pitch variation range achievable via after-touch control.
Each increment represents a semitone. A setting of “0” produces no pitch
variation. A setting of “+12” allows a maximum pitch variation of one octave
up, while a setting of “-12” allows a maximum pitch variation of one octave
down corresponding to aftertouch key pressure.
88
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
5: CS3 PARAMETER EDIT
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Controller → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 5:CS3 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
The [CS3] and [CS4] sliders can be assigned to control a wide range of voice
parameters in real time while playing the SY85. These parameters assign a voice
parameter to the [CS3] slider, and set the maximum and minimum limits of the
control range.
CTRL`CS3`Param(CTRL#=18)``Min.``````Max.
```0:No»Assign``````````````0%``````100%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
CS3 Param (CS3 parameter)
Range: 0 … 75
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Assigns any of 75 different voice parameters to be controlled via the [CS3]
slider.
The numbers and abbreviations associated with each voice parameter are
listed below:
CS3 PARAMETER LIST (0 … 39)
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
“No_Assign ”
“CT_MW_Pmod”
“CT_MW_Amod”
“CT_MW_Fmod”
“CT_MW_Coff”
“CT_MW_EGBs”
“CT_FC_Pmod”
“CT_FC_Amod”
“CT_FC_Fmod”
“CT_FC_Coff”
“CT_FC_EGBs”
“CT_AT_Pmod”
“CT_AT_Amod”
“CT_AT_Fmod”
“CT_AT_Coff”
“CT_AT_EGBs”
“CT_AT_PtBs”
“CT_PBRange”
“CT_VLLoLim”
“TotalLevel”
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
“EF_SendLvl”
“OS_FrqFine”
“OS_Random ”
“PEG_Rate1 ”
“PEG_Rate2 ”
“PEG_Rate3 ”
“PEG_RlsRt ”
“PEG_Level0”
“PEG_Level1”
“PEG_Level2”
“PEG_Level3”
“PEG_RlsLvl”
“PEG_Range ”
“PEG_LvlVel”
“PEG_RtVel ”
“LFO_Speed ”
“LFO_Delay ”
“LFO_Pmod ”
“LFO_Amod ”
“LFO_Fmod ”
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
89
CS3 PARAMETER LIST (40 … 75)
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
“LFO_Wave ”
“LFO_Phase”
“LFO_SpdVel”
“LFO_SpdRnd”
“AEG_Rate1 ”
“AEG_Rate2 ”
“AEG_Rate3 ”
“AEG_Rate4 ”
“AEG_RlsRt ”
“AEG_Level2”
“AEG_Level3”
“AEG_LvlVel”
“AEG_RtVel ”
“FLT_Reso ”
“FLT_CofVel”
“FLT_ARVel ”
“FLT_Band ”
“FLT_CofFrq”
“FLT_Rate1 ”
“FLT_Rate2 ”
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
“FLT_Rate3 ”
“FLT_Rate4 ”
“FLT_RlsRt1”
“FLT_RlsRt2”
“FLT_Level0”
“FLT_Level1”
“FLT_Level2”
“FLT_Level3”
“FLT_Level4”
“FLT_RlsLv1”
“FLT_RlsLv2”
“OS_NoteSft”
“FLT_BPLvl1”
“FLT_BPLvl2”
“FLT_BPLvl3”
“FLT_BPLvl4”
The parameter assigned to [CS3] can also be controlled from an external
MIDI controller via MIDI control number 18. Operation of the [CS3] slider in
the VOICE or PERFORMANCE mode also transmits corresponding MIDI
control change data using control number 18.
Min.
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the lower limit of the [CS3] control range. A setting of “0”, for example, means that when the [CS3] slider is set to its lowest position the assigned
parameter will also be set to its lowest value. A setting of “50” means that the
lowest [CS3] position will set the assigned parameter to about 50% of its range
(a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be set to about 63).
Max.
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the upper limit of the [CS3] control range. A setting of “100”, for
example, means that when the [CS3] slider is set to its highest position the
assigned parameter will also be set to its highest value. A setting of “80”
means that the highest [CS3] position will set the assigned parameter to about
80% of its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be
set to about 102).
90
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
6: CS4 PARAMETER EDIT
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Controller → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [MENU] → 6:CS4 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
The [CS3] and [CS4] sliders can be assigned to control a wide range of voice
parameters in real time while playing the SY85. These parameters assign a voice
parameter to the [CS4] slider, and set the maximum and minimum limits of the
control range.
CTRL`CS4`Param(CTRL#=19)``Min.``````Max.
```0:No»Assign``````````````0%``````100%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
CS4 Param (CS4 parameter)
Range: 0 … 75
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Assigns any of 75 different voice parameters to be controlled via the [CS4]
slider.
The numbers and abbreviations associated with each voice parameter are
listed below:
CS4 PARAMETER LIST (0 … 39)
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
“No_Assign ”
“CT_MW_Pmod”
“CT_MW_Amod”
“CT_MW_Fmod”
“CT_MW_Coff”
“CT_MW_EGBs”
“CT_FC_Pmod”
“CT_FC_Amod”
“CT_FC_Fmod”
“CT_FC_Coff”
“CT_FC_EGBs”
“CT_AT_Pmod”
“CT_AT_Amod”
“CT_AT_Fmod”
“CT_AT_Coff”
“CT_AT_EGBs”
“CT_AT_PtBs”
“CT_PBRange”
“CT_VLLoLim”
“TotalLevel”
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
“EF_SendLvl”
“OS_FrqFine”
“OS_Random ”
“PEG_Rate1 ”
“PEG_Rate2 ”
“PEG_Rate3 ”
“PEG_RlsRt ”
“PEG_Level0”
“PEG_Level1”
“PEG_Level2”
“PEG_Level3”
“PEG_RlsLvl”
“PEG_Range ”
“PEG_LvlVel”
“PEG_RtVel ”
“LFO_Speed ”
“LFO_Delay ”
“LFO_Pmod ”
“LFO_Amod ”
“LFO_Fmod ”
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
91
CS4 PARAMETER LIST (40 … 75)
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
“LFO_Wave ”
“LFO_Phase”
“LFO_SpdVel”
“LFO_SpdRnd”
“AEG_Rate1 ”
“AEG_Rate2 ”
“AEG_Rate3 ”
“AEG_Rate4 ”
“AEG_RlsRt ”
“AEG_Level2”
“AEG_Level3”
“AEG_LvlVel”
“AEG_RtVel ”
“FLT_Reso ”
“FLT_CofVel”
“FLT_ARVel ”
“FLT_Band ”
“FLT_CofFrq”
“FLT_Rate1 ”
“FLT_Rate2 ”
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
“FLT_Rate3 ”
“FLT_Rate4 ”
“FLT_RlsRt1”
“FLT_RlsRt2”
“FLT_Level0”
“FLT_Level1”
“FLT_Level2”
“FLT_Level3”
“FLT_Level4”
“FLT_RlsLv1”
“FLT_RlsLv2”
“OS_NoteSft”
“FLT_BPLvl1”
“FLT_BPLvl2”
“FLT_BPLvl3”
“FLT_BPLvl4”
The parameter assigned to [CS4] can also be controlled from an external
MIDI controller via MIDI control number 19. Operation of the [CS4] slider in
the VOICE or PERFORMANCE mode also transmits corresponding MIDI
control change data using control number 19.
Min (Minimum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the lower limit of the [CS4] control range. A setting of “0”, for example, means that when the [CS4] slider is set to its lowest position the assigned
parameter will also be set to its lowest value. A setting of “50” means that the
lowest [CS4] position will set the assigned parameter to about 50% of its range
(a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be set to about 63).
Max (Maximum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the upper limit of the [CS4] control range. A setting of “100”, for
example, means that when the [CS4] slider is set to its highest position the
assigned parameter will also be set to its highest value. A setting of “80”
means that the highest [CS4] position will set the assigned parameter to about
80% of its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be
set to about 102).
92
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
CONTROLLER DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Controller → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES] → [COPY]
This function allows the controller parameters from any other voice (the “source”
voice) to be copied to the current voice. You can copy a controller setup that is close
to the type you want, then edit it to produce the required sound.
CONTROLLER`COPY`From`Voice``````````````
`````````````````````¡A1:InitVce
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Voice
Range: Any INTERNAL or CARD voice
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY keys to
select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected. Use the
GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM keys to
select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry controls
can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
CONTROLLER`COPY`From`Voice``````````````
Are`you`sure`?```````¡A1:InitVce
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the controller data, or press
[EXIT/NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished,
“Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to
the controller edit mode.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
6:Controller
93
VOICE TOTAL LEVEL
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 7:Total Level → [ENTER/YES]
The ability to independently adjust the volume of each voice makes it possible to
match levels for smooth transition when switching between voices.
VOICE`Total`Level``
````````````````127ƒ``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Total Level
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Adjusts the volume of the current voice.
A setting of “0” produces no sound while a setting of “127” produces
maximum volume. A bar graph to the right of the parameter provides a visual
indication of volume level — the longer the bar, the higher the volume.
94
VOICE EDIT MODE /
7:Total Level
VOICE NAME
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 8:Name → [ENTER/YES]
Your original voices should naturally have original names. This function can be
used to assign a name of up to 8 characters to the current voice.
VOICE`Name````````````````````"InitVce`"
[CLR][UPR][LWR][SPC]````````````[†]``[¥]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Name
Range: See character list, below
Controls: [F1] … [F4], [F7], [F8], [CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial,
GROUP, PROGRAM
Assigns a name of up to 8 characters to the current voice.
Use the [F7] function key to move the character cursor to the left, and the
[F8] function key to move the cursor to the right. Use the GROUP and PROGRAM keys to input a character at the cursor position. Each GROUP and
PROGRAM key selects the three characters printed above it in sequence. It is
also possible to use the [-1] and [+1] keys or dial to scroll through the available characters (see list below).
The sliders, [CS1] through [CS8], independently select characters for the
corresponding character position: [CS1] selects the first character, [CS2] selects
the second character, and so on.
The first four function keys also perform important functions: [F1] clears
the entire name, [F2] selects upper-case characters, [F3] selects lower-case
characters, and [F4] inserts a space at the cursor position.
GROUP key
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
A → B → C
D → E → F
G → H → I
J → K → L
M → N → O
P → Q → R
S → T → U
V → W → X
PROGRAM key
[1]:
[2]:
[3]:
[4]:
[5]:
[6]:
[7]:
[8]:
Y → Z → 0
1 → 2 → 3
4 → 5 → 6
7 → 8 → 9
* → & → _
/ → . → ,
’ → ! → ?
# → : → ;
VOICE EDIT MODE /
8:Name
95
1: WAVE
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Wave → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters provide a fast, easy way to select a new wave for the current
voice, and instantly set the main amplitude envelope generator parameters to values
that produce good results with the selected wave.
For full oscillator parameters see page 58.
QED`WAVE)Group``````Number``
```````16:Osc```````P244:Sin
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Group
Range: 1 … 16
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
For fast, easy selection of the preset SY85 waves this parameter selects 16
different wave categories or “groups”, each containing a number of waves that
can be individually selected by using the “Number” parameter, below.
Quick Edit Wave Groups
1:Piano
2:Key
3:Brass
4:Wind
5:Strings
6:A.Guitar
7:E.Guitar
8:Bass
9:Folk
10:Synth
11:Choir
12:TPerc
13:Drum
14:Perc
15:SE
16:Osc
96
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
Acoustic pianos
Other keyboards
Brass instruments
Wind instruments
Strings
Acoustic guitars
Electric guitars
Acoustic & electric bass
Folk & ethnic instruments
Synthesizer sounds
Choir & human voice
Tuned percussion
Drums
Percussion instruments
Sound effects
Basic oscillator waveforms
Number
Range: P001 … P244, I00 … I63, C00 … C63
Controls: MEMORY, [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the wave (AWM waveform) to be used in the current voice. Use the
“Group” parameter, above, to select the group containing the wave that is to be
selected. The [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] keys can also be
used to select the memory area from which the wave is to be selected. A
complete listing of the internal waves is given in the Appendix, on page 310.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
97
2: AMPLITUDE EG
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:AEG → [ENTER/YES]
Rather than having to set numerous level and rate values via the full-edit amplitude EG parameters, these parameters let you select from a range of preset envelope
types, and then modify the overall attack, sustain, and release characteristics as required.
For full amplitude EG parameters see page 60.
QED`AEG)Type`````````Atk``Sus``Rel``Vel`
``0:--------``````````63```63```50```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Type (Envelope type)
Range: 00 … 21
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects either the envelope defined by the current amplitude envelope parameter settings (page 60), or one of 21 preset amplitude envelope types for the
current voice. The envelope types are:
Quick Edit Envelope Types
00:-------01:Piano
02:Brass
03:SfzBrass
04:SynBrass
05:StFast
06:StSlw/Pd
07:E.Bass
08:SynBass1
09:SynBass2
10:Organ
11:Guitar
12:Pluck1
13:Pluck2
14:SynPad
15:SynComp
16:Percusiv
17:S.Ideal1
18:S.Ideal2
19:S.Ideal3
20:S.Ideal4
21:Init
98
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
Full-edit envelope
Acoustic piano
Brass
Sforzando brass
Synthesizer brass
Fast-attack strings
Slow-attack strings (pad)
Electric bass
Synthesizer bass 1
Synthesizer bass 2
Organ
Guitar
Plucked instrument 1
Pluched instrument 2
Synthesizer pad
Synthesizer comping (backing)
Percussive
Sound envelope 1
Sound envelope 2
Sound envelope 3
Sound envelope 4
Initialized envelope
Atk (Attack rate)
Range: 0 … 63
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the attack rate for the selected envelope. “63” produces the fastest
attack, while “0” produces the slowest attack.
Sus (Sustain level)
Range: 0 … 63
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the sustain level for the selected envelope.
Rel (Release rate)
Range: 0 … 63
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the release rate for the selected envelope.
Velo (Velocity sensitivity)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the output level of the current voice changes in response to
velocity changes (e.g. keyboard dynamics).
Plus “+” settings produce higher output level in response to higher velocity
values — i.e. the harder a key is played, the louder the sound. The maximum
setting of “+7” produces the maximum level variation in response to velocity
changes. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect: lower level in response
to higher velocity. A setting of “+0” results in no level variation.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
99
3: FILTER
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Filter → [ENTER/YES]
The simplified filter parameters provided here have been specifically created for
fast, efficient filter programming.
For full filter parameters see page 65.
QED`FILTER)Type```````````Coff`Reso``Vel
`````````````0:--------```---```--```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Type (Filter type)
Range: 0 … 15
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects either the filter defined by the current filter parameter settings (page
65), or one of 15 preset filter types for the current voice. The filter types are:
Quick Edit Filter Types
0:-------1:VeloSoft
2:VeloWide
3:VeloHard
4:VeloReso
5:SynBass1
6:SynBass2
7:SynBras1
8:SynBras2
9:Sweep
10:SlowAtak
11:LPF_Init
12:HPF_Init
13:BPF_Init
14:BEF_Init
15:Thru
Full-edit filter
Velocity sensitive, soft response
Velocity sensitive, wide response
Velocity sensitive, hard response
Velocity sensitive, resonant
Synthesizer bass 1
Synthesizer bass 2
Synthesizer brass 1
Synthesizer brass 2
Sweep-frequency filter
Slow-attack filter
Initialized LPF
Initialized HPF
Initialized BP
Initialized BEF
No filter
Coff (Cutoff frequency)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the cutoff frequency of the selected filter.
Lower cutoff values produce a lower cutoff frequency and higher values
produce a higher cutoff frequency. If the “Thru” filter type is selected, no
cutoff frequency can be set and “---” appears on the display in place of the
parameter.
100
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
Reso (Resonance)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the degree of filter resonance.
This parameter has a similar effect to the “resonance” settings on traditional
analog synthesizer filters — i.e. it determines the height of a peak in the filter
response at the cutoff frequency. If a filter type other than “LPF” is selected,
no resonance can be produced and “---” appears on the display in place of the
parameter.
The illustrations here are not available.
Higher resonance values produce a higher resonant peak and reduce the
overall bandwidth of the filter, passing a narrow band of frequencies at the
filter’s cutoff.
Vel (Velocity sensitivity)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the filter cutoff frequency changes in response to velocity
changes (e.g. keyboard dynamics).
Plus “+” settings produce higher cutoff frequencies in response to higher
velocity values — i.e. the harder a key is played, the higher the cutoff frequency. The maximum setting of “+63” produces the maximum level variation
in response to velocity changes. Minus “-” settings produce the opposite effect:
lower cutoff in response to higher velocity. A setting of “+0” results in no
cutoff variation.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
101
4: LFO
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:LFO → [ENTER/YES]
Here, the main LFO parameters are simplified and concentrated in a single screen
for quick, easy programming.
For full LFO parameters see page 78.
QED`LFO)```Type`````Speed``Depth``
```````````--------```64```---``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Type (LFO modulation type)
Range: --------, vibrato, tremolo, wahwah
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the LFO will produce vibrato (pitch modulation),
tremolo (amplitude modulation), or wahwah (filter cutoff modulation) effects.
The current LFO parameter settings (page 78) are selected when this parameter
is set to “--------”.
Speed
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the speed of the LFO.
“0” is the slowest speed setting, producing an LFO speed of approximately
0 Hertz. The fastest setting of 99 produces an LFO speed of approximately 25
Hertz.
Depth
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the maximum amount of amplitude (tremolo), pitch (vibrato), or filter
cutoff (wahwah) modulation that can be applied to the current voice.
A “0” setting produces no modulation while a setting of “127” produces
maximum modulation.
102
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
5: EFFECT TYPE
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:Effect Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a complex, high-performance effect system that can be programmed easily via the parameters presented here and in the following screen.
For a complete list of effect parameters see page 274.
QED`EFFECT)```Type```````````Wet`Balance
``06:Rev.Stage1``00:Through``````````50%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Effect Type 1/2
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS1]/[CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS1] selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor, and [CS4] does the same for the EFFECT 2 processor. See page 254 for
more details on the SY85 effect system.
Wet Balance
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS8] controls the balance between the direct no-effect sound and the effect
sound delivered via the OUTPUT 1 jacks. The maximum setting of “100”
produces maximum effect depth.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
103
6: EFFECT PARAMETER
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Effect Param → [ENTER/YES]
QED`EF`PARAM)`<```Stge>``)LPF`````[kHz](
`2.5``1.0```45``1.0``---``---``---``--F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
This screen provides access to the four main parameters each for the current
selected effect 1 and effect 2. The four effect 1 parameters are edited via [CS1]
through [CS4], while the four effect 2 parameters are edited via [CS5] through [CS8].
The parameters are different for each effect (refer to page 274 for details). The
EFFECT mode PARAMETERS screen described on page 109 provides full access to
all 8 effect parameters.
104
VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
1: MODE, TYPE
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Mode, Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a dual-processor effect system that includes 90 top-quality
digital effects. Two different effects can be connected in series or parallel, providing
an extensive range of possible configurations.
EF`Mode`````EF1`Type```````EF2`Type``
```2:para```06:Rev.Stage1``00:Through
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Mode
Range: 0:off, 1:seri, 2:para
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the SY85’s two effect processors are connected in
series (“1:seri”) or in parallel (“2:para”), or whether the entire effect system is
turned off (“0:off”).
EF1 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
EF2 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 2 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
105
2: SEND, MIX, WET:DRY
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Send, Mix, Wet:Dry → [ENTER/YES]
The balance between the direct sound of the voice and the effect sound is a
delicate thing. Even slight changes can make a big different to the final sound. The
parameters provided in this screen provide precise balance control.
EF`Level``Send```EF2`Mix```Out1`Wet:Dry`
```````````127```````---````````50`:`50`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Send (Send level)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter adjusts the amount of direct voice signal that is sent to the
effect processors, determining the strength of the final effect sound. A setting
of “0” results in no effect, leaving only the “dry” sound of the voice. The
maximum setting of “127” produces the maximum amount of effect.
EF2 Mix (Effect 2 mix level)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter can only be used with the “serial” effect mode is selected.
If any other mode is selected (“off” or “para”), “---” appears on the display in
place of the value.
If a controller is assigned to the EF2 Mix parameter (page 110), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Out1 Wet
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter and the “Out1 Dry” parameter, below, work together to
balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”) signals delivered via the OUTPUT
1 jacks. Higher “Out1 Wet” values produce more effect sound in relation to the
direct, dry sound of the voice.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
If a controller is assigned to the “out1 Wet” parameter (page 110), an
inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
106
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
Out1 Dry
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter and the “Out1 Wet” parameter, above, work together to
balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”) signals delivered via the OUTPUT
1 jacks. Higher “Out1 Dry” values produce more direct, dry sound in relation
to the effect sound.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
107
3: OUTPUT LEVEL
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Output Level → [ENTER/YES]
Depending on the selected effects the SY85 effect system can have up to four
separate output levels that are adjusted by the parameters provided in this screen.
EF`OutLevel`1a```1b`````````````2a```2b`
`EF1(sngl)=100%``--``EF2(sngl)=100%``--`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b (Effect output levels)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS3], [CS4], [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
The [CS3] and [CS4] sliders adjust the output levels of the effect 1 “1a”
and “1b” stages, respectively, while the [CS7] and [CS8] sliders adjust the
output levels of the effect 2 “2a” and “2b” stages. A setting of “0” turns output
from the corresponding effect stage off, while a setting of “100” produces
maximum output level.
If the selected effect is a “single” type, then only the “1a” or “2a” output
level is available. If it is a “cascade” type, then only the “1b” or “2b” output
level is available. Both the “1a” and “1b” or “2a” and “2b” levels are available
only if the selected effect is a “dual” type. The type of the effects currently
selected for the effect 1 and effect 2 processors are shown in parentheses on
the bottom line of the display. See page 254 for details on the effect stages and
the SY85 effect system in general.
If a controller is assigned to any of the output level parameters (page 110),
an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
108
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
4: EFFECT 1 PARAMETERS
5: EFFECT 2 PARAMETERS
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:EF1 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
→ 5:EF2 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
Each of the SY85’s 90 effects has 8 parameters that can be edited via the parameters in this screen to fine-tune the effect.
EF1`PARAM`<Rev.Stage1>```)Init`Dly`[ms](
`2.5``1.0```10````0```16````4```45``1.0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Each parameter is controlled by the corresponding slider (i.e. the slider immediately below each parameter). The [-1]/[+1] keys and data entry dial can also be used
to edit the parameter at which the cursor is currently located.
Refer to page 274 for a complete listing of the parameters provided for each
effect.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
109
6: CONTROL PARAMETERS
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Control Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 [CS1] and [CS2] sliders can be assigned to control different effect
parameters in real time while playing in the voice or performance modes. The parameters provided in this screen determine which effect parameters are to be controlled
by the [CS1] and [CS2] sliders, the minimum and maximum parameter values, and
assign MIDI control numbers to the same parameters for MIDI effect control.
EF`CTRL)````````(`Min``Max``Additional`
``CS1`:`0ff````````0%`100%`000:off
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
CS1/CS2 (CS1/CS2 switch)
Range: CS1, CS2
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects [CS1] or [CS2] for assignment.
Parameter (Effect parameter)
Range: Depends on selected effects.
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the effect parameter to be controlled by the currently selected slider.
Since each effect has as many as 8 different parameters, the maximum number
of settings available for this parameter will be 8: “Ef1prm1” through “Ef1prm8”
on the display, for example, stands for “effect 1 parameter 1” through “effect 1
parameter 8”. The parameters available for each effect are different, but the
name of the selected parameter will be shown between the parentheses on the
top line of the display. Parameters that can not be assigned to the sliders are
indicated by dashes (“--------”) instead of a parameter name.
Min (Minimum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the lower limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of “0”,
for example, means that when the slider is set to its lowest position the assigned parameter will also be set to its lowest value. A setting of “50” means
that the lowest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about 50% of
its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be set to
about 63).
If a controller is assigned to the “Min” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
110
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
Max (Maximum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the upper limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of
“100”, for example, means that when the slider is set to its highest position the
assigned parameter will also be set to its highest value. A setting of “80”
means that the highest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about
80% of its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be
set to about 102).
If a controller is assigned to the “Max” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
Additional (Additional MIDI control)
Range: 000 … 120, AfterTch, Velocity, KeyScale, LFO
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter allows MIDI control change numbers to be assigned to the
selected effect parameters, so that they can be controlled from the SY85 controllers (modulation wheel, foot controller, etc) or an external MIDI device that
is capable of transmitting control change messages. Additional settings include
“AfterTch” for keyboard aftertouch control, “Velocity” for keyboard velocity
control, “KeyScale” for key scaling control, and “LFO” for internal LFO control. This is in addition to control via the [CS1] and [CS2] sliders. MIDI control change numbers 000 through 120 can be assigned. Some control change
numbers are already defined, while others are not assigned to any specific
controller (see chart below).
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE NUMBER/DEVICE
0:
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
10:
11:
64:
65:
66:
67:
69:
“--------”
“Mod.Whl.”
“Breath C”
“Foot Cnt”
“Porta.Tm”
“Data Ent”
“Main Vol”
“Balance ”
“Panpot ”
“Express.”
“Hold 1 ”
“Porta.Sw”
“Sostenut”
“Soft
”
“Hold 2 ”
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
121:
122:
123:
124:
“Effect D”
“TremoloD”
“Chorus D”
“CelesteD”
“Phaser D”
“Inc.
”
“Dec.
”
“NRPN LSB”
“NRPN MSB”
“RPN LSB”
“RPN MSB”
“AfterTch”
“Velocity”
“KeyScale”
“LFO
”
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
111
7: EFFECT LFO
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 7:Control LFO → [ENTER/YES]
All of the modulation-type effects — chorus, flanging, etc. — require LFO control. The SY85 has an independent effect LFO that is set up by the following parameters.
EF`CTRL`LFO``Waveform````Speed````Delay`
``````````````∆˚∆`tri````````0````````0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Wave (LFO waveform)
Range: tri, dwn, up, squ, sin, S/H, 1tm
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the waveform of the effect LFO.
“tri” = Triangle
“up” = Upward sawtooth
“sin” = Sine
“dwn” = Downward sawtooth
“squ” = Square
“S/H” = Sample and hold
“1tm” = Upward 1-shot
If a controller is assigned to the “Wave” parameter (page 110), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Speed (LFO speed)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the speed of the effect LFO.
“0” is the slowest Speed setting, producing an LFO speed of approximately
0 Hertz. The fastest setting of 99 produces an LFO speed of approximately 25
Hertz.
If a controller is assigned to the “Speed” parameter (page 110), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Delay
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the delay time between the beginning of a note and the beginning of
effect LFO operation for the selected element.
The minimum setting “0” results in no delay, while the maximum setting of
“99” produces a delay of approximately 2.66 seconds before the LFO begins
operation (5.3 seconds before it reaches maximum depth).
If a controller is assigned to the “Delay” parameter (page 110), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
112
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
EFFECT DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [COPY]
This function facilitates voice effect editing by allowing the effect parameters
from any other song, voice, or performance combination to be copied to the current
voice. You can copy an effect setup that is close to the type you want, then edit it to
produce the required sound.
EFFECT`COPY`````From````````````````````
````````````````VCE``¡A1:InitVce
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Voice
Range: Any song, voice or performance combination
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS4], [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS4] slider to select the mode containing the desired voice and
effect data (“PFM” = PERFORMANCE, “VCE” = VOICE, and “MLT” =
MULTI). Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY
keys to select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected.
Use the GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM
keys to select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry
controls can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
EFFECT`COPY`````From````````````````````
Are`you`sure`?``VCE``¡A1:InitVce
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the effect data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
effect edit mode.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
113
EFFECT SIGNAL FLOW DISPLAY
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [SHIFT] + [F1] ~ [F3]
This function provides a graphic indication of the current effect system configuration while in the effect edit mode.
● Overall Effect Flow
EFFECT`FLOW`Ú`∏Á∏∏∏∏∏∏
Î`Ú`EF1=Rotary`SP.
`Mode=`para`Ú`∏∏∏∏∏
Á∏∏`Ú`EF2=Dist->`Rev
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 1 Configuration
EF1`Send1a>---[R.SPÙ]------------Ç->OUT1
`````````````````````````````````’-<DRY1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 2 Configuration
EF2`Send2a>---[Dist`]-Ÿ-[Rev`Ç]--◊ ->OUT2
````Send2b>-----------Û``````````’-<DRY2
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [SHIFT] + [F1] to see the overall effect system signal flow. Press [SHIFT]
+ [F2] to see the effect 1 section configuration, and [SHIFT] + [F3] for the effect 2
section configuration. Press the [EXIT/NO] key to exit from the effect signal flow
display.
Refer the to section beginning on page 254 for details on the effect system.
114
VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
1: VOICE EDIT RECALL
[VOICE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 1:Recall → [ENTER/YES]
If you’re dissatisfied with the results of edits you’ve made to a voice, or have
accidentally lost track of changes made, use the VOICE EDIT RECALL function to
recall the pre-edit voice data from the SY85’s voice backup buffer memory.
VOICE`JOB`Recall``````````````<InitVce`>
``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the recall procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
VOICE`JOB`Recall``````````````<InitVce`>
Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
recall operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/NO]
to cancel.
When the original voice data has been recalled, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to calling the voice edit recall function.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
JOB
115
2: VOICE INITIALIZE
[VOICE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 2:Initialize → [ENTER/YES]
When you want to program a totally new voice “from scratch,” rather than editing
an existing voice, use this function to initialize all voice parameters.
VOICE`JOB`Initialize`
`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the initialize procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
VOICE`JOB`Initialize`
Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
initialize operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel.
When the voice data has been initialized, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior
to calling the voice initialize function.
116
VOICE EDIT MODE /
JOB
VOICE COMPARE
[SHIFT] + [STORE]
The voice compare function makes it possible to compare the sound of a voice
being edited with the same voice prior to editing.
The illustrations here are not available.
To temporarily recall the original voice while editing, press the [STORE] key
while holding the [SHIFT] key. The [VOICE] LED will flash, indicating that the
compare mode is engaged. Data cannot be edited in the compare mode. Press [EXIT/
NO] again to return to the edit mode and the voice being edited.
VOICE EDIT MODE /
COMPARE
117
VOICE STORE
[STORE]
When you’re satsfied with a new voice you’ve created in the voice edit mode, use
the store function described below to store the new voice to an internal or card
memory location.
VOICE`STORE``````````To
`````````````````````¡A1:InitVce
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
When you’ve finished editing, return to the normal voice play mode (press
the [VOICE] key), and before selecting a different voice press the [STORE]
key. You can now use the MEMORY, GROUP, and NUMBER keys to select
the memory location to which your new voice is to be stored.
Once the store location has been specified, press [ENTER/YES] to begin
the store procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
VOICE`STORE``````````To
Are`you`sure`?```````¡A1:InitVce
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
store operation (which will erase all previous data in the specified memory
location), or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the voice data has been stored, “Completed!” will appear briefly on
the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to
calling the store function.
118
VOICE EDIT MODE /
STORE
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE
1: KEY PARAMETERS 1
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Key Param1 → [ENTER/YES]
DRUM`KEY`<BD6`````>``Vol``Nsft`Tune`Pan`
``C1``````Wave`P156``120ƒ``+0```+0```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Key Number
Range: C1 … C5
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Selects the the drum key to be edited. In addition to using the [CS1] slider,
data entry dial, and [-1] and [+1] keys, the drum key can be selected by simply
pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard.
Wave
Range: P001 … P244, I00 … I63, C00 … C63
Controls: MEMORY, [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the wave (AWM waveform) to be played by the current drum key.
Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] keys to select the
memory area from which the wave is to be selected. A complete listing of the
internal waves is given in the Appendix, on page 310.
Vol
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
For optimum balance between the instruments in a drum “kit,” this parameter allows the volume of the current drum key to be adjusted independently. A
setting of “0” produces no sound, while a setting of “127” produces maximum
volume.
Nsft
Range: -48 … +36
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Shifts the pitch of selected drum key up or down in semitone steps.
A setting of “-12,” for example, shifts the pitch of the selected layer down
by one octave; a setting of “+4” shifts the pitch up by a major third.
120
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
DRUM KEY EDIT
Tune
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Allows upward or downward pitch adjustment of the current drum key in
approximately 1.7-cent steps (a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone).
The maximum minus setting of “-63” produces a downward pitch shift of
approximately three quarters of a semitone, and the maximum plus setting of
“+63” shifts the pitch up by the same amount. A setting of “0” produces no
pitch change.
Pan
Range: -31 … +31
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Interesting stereo effects can be produced by placing the sound of different
drum instruments at different locations in the stereo sound field. This parameter
determines the position in the stereo sound field in which the sound from the
current drum key will be heard (left to right).
Minus values represent panning to the left, and positive values represent
panning to the right. “0” positions the sound of the selected layer in the center
of the stereo sound field.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
DRUM KEY EDIT
121
2: KEY PARAMETERS 2
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Key Param2 → [ENTER/YES]
DRUM`KEY`<BD6`````>AltGrp`GateTime``Rvs`
``C1`````````````````off``normal````off`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Key Number
Range: C1 … C5
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Selects the the drum key to be edited. In addition to using the [CS1] slider,
data entry dial, and [-1] and [+1] keys, the drum key can be selected by simply
pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard.
AltGrp
Range: off, 1 … 5
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Assigns the selected drum key to an “alternate group” numbered between 1
and 5. No two drum keys assigned to the same alternate group number can
sound at the same time. This is most commonly used to create a realistic hi-hat
cymbal effect: the closed and open hi-hat keys are assigned to the same alternate group, so that when the closed hi-hat key is played the open hi-hat sound
is immediately cut off. Turn this parameter “off” if you don’t want the current
drum key to be assigned to any alternate group.
GateTime
Range: short, normal, long, very_long
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the length of the note played by the selected drum key to short, normal, long, or very long. Please note that this parameter will not extend the
length of the waveform assigned to the current drum key, so no change may be
heard even if you select the “very long” gate time for a short wave.
Rvs (Reverse)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
When this parameter is turned “on,” the selected wave is played in reverse.
When Rvs is “on,” the pitch EG “Loop” parameter described on page 75 is
automatically turned “off.”
122
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
DRUM KEY EDIT
3: TOTAL LEVEL
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Total Level → [ENTER/YES]
This parameter sets the overall volume of the current drum voice in relation to
the others, making it possible to match levels for smooth transition when switching
between voices.
DRUM````````TotalLevel`VolLowLimit`
````````````````127ƒ````````0``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Total Level
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Adjusts the volume of the current drum voice.
A setting of “0” produces no sound while a setting of “127” produces
maximum volume. A bar graph beside the parameter provides a visual indication of volume level — the longer the bar, the higher the volume.
VolLoLimit (Minimum volume level)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the minimum volume level that can be set by the foot volume
control MIDI volume control data. If this parameter is set to “0,” the minimum
foot volume control position will produce almost no sound. A setting of “63”
will result in about half volume when the control is set to its minimum position. This parameter does not affect keyboard velocity response.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
DRUM KEY EDIT
123
4: DRUM VOICE NAME
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Name → [ENTER/YES]
Your original drum voices should naturally have original names. This function can
be used to assign a name of up to 8 characters to the current drum voice.
DRUM`VOICE`Name```````````````"DR`PTN``"
[CLR][UPR][LWR][SPC]````````````[†]``[¥]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Name
Range: See character list, below
Controls: GROUP, PROGRAM, [F1] … [F4], [F7], [F8]
[CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Assigns a name of up to 8 characters to the current drum voice.
Use the [F7] function key to move the character cursor to the left, and the
[F8] function key to move the cursor to the right. Use the GROUP and PROGRAM keys to input a character at the cursor position. Each GROUP or PROGRAM key selects the three characters printed above it in sequence. It is also
possible to use the [-1] and [+1] keys or dial to scroll through the available
characters (see list below).
The sliders, [CS1] through [CS8], independently select characters for the
corresponding character position: [CS1] selects the first character, [CS2] selects
the second character, and so on.
The first four function keys also perform important functions: [F1] clears
the entire name, [F2] selects upper-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM
key entry, [F3] selects lower-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM key
entry, and [F4] inserts a space at the cursor position.
GROUP key
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
124
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
A → B → C
D → E → F
G → H → I
J → K → L
M → N → O
P → Q → R
S → T → U
V → W → X
DRUM KEY EDIT
PROGRAM key
[1]:
[2]:
[3]:
[4]:
[5]:
[6]:
[7]:
[8]:
Y → Z → 0
1 → 2 → 3
4 → 5 → 6
7 → 8 → 9
* → & → _
/ → . → ,
’ → ! → ?
# → : → ;
DRUM KEY DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EDIT] → [COPY]
This function facilitates drum voice editing by allowing the data from one drum
key (the “source” key) to be copied to any other drum key. You can copy the data
from a key that is close to the sound you want, then edit it as required.
DRUM`KEY`COPY`From<BD6`````>To<BD6`````>
``````````````````````C1````¥```C1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From
Range: C1 … C5
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
To
Range: C1 … C5
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Use the [CS5] slider to select the source (“From”) key, and the [CS7] slider
to select the destination (“To”) key. The source and destination keys can also
be selected by simply pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard after placing the cursor at the “From” or “To” parameter position by pressing the [F5] or
[F7] function key, respectively. The names of the waves currently assigned to
the “From” and “To” keys are displayed above the key numbers.
Once the source and destination keys have been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are you sure?” will appear on the display.
DRUM`KEY`COPY`From<BD6`````>To<BD6`````>
Are`you`sure`?````````C1````¥```C1
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the drum key data, or press
[EXIT/NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished,
“Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to
the drum edit mode.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
DRUM KEY EDIT
125
1: EFFECT TYPE
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Effect Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a complex, high-performance effect system that can be programmed easily via the parameters presented here and in the following screen.
For a complete list of effect parameters see page 274.
QED`EFFECT)```Type```````````Wet`Balance
``03:Rev.Room1```12:Rev.Basmnt``40%``10%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Effect Type 1/2
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS1]/[CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS1] selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor, and [CS4] does the same for the EFFECT 2 processor. See page 254 for
more details on the SY85 effect system.
Wet Balance 1/2
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS7]/[CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS7] controls the balance between the direct no-effect sound and the effect
sound of the EFFECT 1 processor, while [CS8] does the same for the EFFECT
2 processor. The higher the value the deeper the effect. See page 254 for more
details on the SY85 effect system.
126
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
2: EFFECT SEND LEVEL
[VOICE] → [QUICK EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Effect Send → [ENTER/YES]
The ability to set different effect send levels for each drum key provides extremely fine control over the drum effect sound.
QED`EFFECT)Send`Level`````````<BD6`````>
````Key=`C1`````127
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Key
Range: C1 … C5
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial, keyboard
Selects the drum key (C1 … C5) for which the send level is to be adjusted.
Use either the [CS2] slider or the keyboard to enter the key number.
Send Level
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the effect send level for the selected drum key.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
QUICK EDIT
127
1: MODE, TYPE
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Mode Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a dual-processor effect system that includes 90 top-quality
digital effects. Two different effects can be connected in series or parallel, providing
an extensive range of possible configurations.
EF`Mode`````EF1`Type```````EF2`Type``
```2:para```03:Rev.Room1```12:Rev.Basmnt
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Mode
Range: 0:off, 1:seri, 2:para
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the SY85’s two effect processors are connected in
series (“1:seri”) or in parallel (“2:para”), or whether the entire effect system is
turned off (“0:off”).
EF1 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
EF2 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 2 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
128
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
2: KEY SEND SELECT & LEVEL
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Send → [ENTER/YES]
The parameters provided here determine to which of the SY85 effect stages the
output from each drum key is sent, and at what level. It is also possible to control
the effect send level via keyboard dynamics.
EF`Send`<BD6`````>``Switch`````Levl`VelS
``Key=`C1````````````1./-`2./-``127```+0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Key
Range: C1 … C5
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Selects the drum key (C1 … C5) for which the send select and level parameters are to be adjusted. Use either the [CS2] slider or the keyboard to enter
the key number.
Switch 1a, 1b/2a, 2b
Range: See text below
Controls: [CS5]/[CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines to which of the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 effect stages the
output from the current layer is sent. Each time the [F5] or [F6] function key is
pressed, the cursor alternately moves to the corresponding “a” or “b” parameter.
The [-1] and [+1] keys can then be used to turn the stage on (“a” or “b”) or
off (“.”). The [CS5] and [CS6] sliders select the following settings in sequence:
CS5 (EFFECT 1)
CS6 (EFFECT 2)
1./.
1a/.
1a/b
1./b
2./.
2a/.
2a/b
2./b
(a
(a
(a
(a
and b off)
on, b off)
and b on)
off, b on)
(a
(a
(a
(a
and b off)
on, b off)
and b on)
off, b on)
If a “single” type effect is selected then only stage “a” can be selected. If a
“cascade” type effect is selected, then only stage “b” can be selected. If a
“dual” type effect is selected, then both stages “a” and “b” can be selected. An
effect stage that cannot be selected is represented by “-” on the display.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
129
Send (Send level)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter adjusts the amount of direct voice signal that is sent to the
effect processors, determining the strength of the final effect sound. A setting
of “0” results in no effect, leaving only the “dry” sound of the voice. The
maximum setting of “127” produces the maximum amount of effect.
VelS (Send velocity sensitivity)
Range: -7 … +7
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines how the send level from the selected drum key is affected by
velocity changes (e.g. keyboard dynamics).
Plus “+” settings produce higher send levels in response to higher velocity
values — i.e. the harder a key is played, the higher the send level, and therefore the deeper the effect. The maximum setting of “+7” produces the maximum level variation in response to velocity changes. Minus “-” settings produce
the opposite effect: lower send level in response to higher velocity. A setting of
“+0” results in no send level variation.
130
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
3: KEY DRY OUTPUT SELECT
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Key Dry Out Select → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determine turn the “dry lines” (i.e. the signal paths which bypasses each effect processor) on or off, determining whether any dry signal output
can occur at OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2.
OUTPUT`Select`<BD6`````>`Dry1`Dry2```
``Key=`C1``````````````````on```on``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Key
Range: C1 … C5
Controls: [CS2], GROUP [A] … [D], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the key to be edited. The name of the voice assigned to the selected
key is shown between parentheses on the upper line of the display.
Dry1
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns the “dry line” bypassing the EFFECT 1 signal processor on or off.
When this parameter is turned “off,” the “WET:DRY BALANCE” parameters
(page 133) have no effect.
Dry2
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns the “dry line” bypassing the EFFECT 2 signal processor on or off.
When this parameter is turned “off,” the “WET:DRY BALANCE” parameters
(page 133) have no effect.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
131
4: OUTPUT LEVEL
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Output Level → [ENTER/YES]
Depending on the selected effects the SY85 effect system can have up to four
separate output levels that are adjusted by the parameters provided in this screen.
EF`OutLevel`1a```1b`````````````2a```2b`
`EF1(sngl)=100%``--``EF2(sngl)=`98%``-F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b (Effect output levels)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS3], [CS4], [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
The [CS3] and [CS4] sliders adjust the output levels of the effect 1 “1a”
and “1b” stages, respectively, while the [CS7] and [CS8] sliders adjust the
output levels of the effect 2 “2a” and “2b” stages. A setting of “0” turns output
from the corresponding effect stage off, while a setting of “100” produces
maximum output level.
If the selected effect is a “single” type, then only the “1a” or “2a” output
level is available. If it is a “cascade” type, then only the “1b” or “2b” output
level is available. Both the “1a” and “1b” or “2a” and “2b” levels are available
only if the selected effect is a “dual” type. The type of the effects currently
selected for the effect 1 and effect 2 processors are shown in parentheses on
the bottom line of the display. See page 254 for details on the effect stages and
the SY85 effect system in general.
If a controller is assigned to any of the output level parameters (page 136),
an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
132
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
5: WET:DRY BALANCE
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:Wet:Dry Balance → [ENTER/YES]
The balance between the direct sound of the voice and the effect sound is a
delicate thing. Even slight changes can make a big difference to the final sound. The
parameters provided in this screen provide precise balance control.
EF`Wet:Dry`Balance``````````
`````Out1=``40®:`60``````Out2=``16`:`84`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Out1 Wet/Out2 Wet
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS3]/[CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters and the corresponding “Out1 Dry” and “Out2 Dry” parameters, below, work together to balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”)
signals delivered via the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT2 processors. Higher “Wet”
values produce more effect sound in relation to the direct, dry sound of the
voice.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
If a controller is assigned to the “Out1 Wet” or “Out2 Wet” parameter
(page 136), an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Out2 Dry/Out2 Dry
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4]/[CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters and the corresponding “Out1 Wet” and “Out2 Wet” parameters, above, work together to balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”)
signals delivered via the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 processors, respectively.
Higher “Dry” values produce more direct, dry sound in relation to the effect
sound.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
If a controller is assigned to the “Out1 Dry” or “Out2 Dry” parameter (page
136), an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
133
6: SEND & EFFECT 2 MIX LEVEL
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Mix Level → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determine the mix level between each effect send and the output
of the preceding effect stage. Refer to the section beginning on page 254 for details
on the overall SY85 effect system.
EF`Mix`Level```EF2``Insert`1b```2a```2b`
````````````````--`````````--```--```--`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
EF2 Mix (Effect 2 mix level)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Mixes the output of the EFFECT 2 processor with that of the EFFECT 1
processor. This parameter can only be used with the “serial” effect mode is
selected. If any other mode is selected (“off” or “para”), “---” appears on the
display in place of the value.
If a controller is assigned to the EF2 Mix parameter (page 136), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Send 1b, 2a, 2b (Send level)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters mix the dry signal sent to the corresponding effect stage
with the output of the preceding effect stage. The higher the value the greater
mix level. If the current effect configuration does not allow one of these mix
parameters, “--” will appear in place of the mix level parameter.
If a controller is assigned to the one of these parameters (page 136), an
inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
134
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
7: EFFECT 1 PARAMETERS
8: EFFECT 2 PARAMETERS
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 7:EF1 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
→ 8:EF2 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
Each of the SY85’s 90 effects has 8 parameters that can be edited via the parameters in this screen to fine-tune the effect.
EF1`PARAM`<Rev.Room1`>```)Rev.Time``[s](
`1.2``0.8````8````0```50````4```68``5.6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Each parameter is controlled by the corresponding slider (i.e. the slider
immediately below each parameter). The [-1]/[+1] keys and data entry dial can
also be used to edit the parameter at which the cursor is currently located.
Refer to page 274 for a complete listing of the parameters provided for
each effect.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
135
9: CONTROL PARAMETERS
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Key Param2 → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 [CS1] and [CS2] sliders can be assigned to control different effect
parameters in real time while playing in the voice or performance modes. The parameters provided in this screen determine which effect parameters are to be controlled
by the [CS1] and [CS2] sliders, the minimum and maximum parameter values, and
assign MIDI control numbers to the same parameters for MIDI effect control.
EF`CTRL)````````(`Min``Max``Additional`
``CS1`:`Out1`Wet```0%``40%`000:off
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
CS1/CS2 (CS1/CS2 switch)
Range: CS1, CS2
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects [CS1] or [CS2] for assignment.
Parameter (Effect parameter)
Range: Depends on selected effects.
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the effect parameter to be controlled by the currently selected slider.
Since each effect has as many as 8 different parameters, the maximum number
of settings available for this parameter will be 8: “Ef1prm1” through “Ef1prm8”
on the display, for example, stands for “effect 1 parameter 1” through “effect 1
parameter 8”. The parameters available for each effect are different, but the
name of the selected parameter will be shown between the parentheses on the
top line of the display. Parameters that can not be assigned to the sliders are
indicated by dashes (“--------”) instead of a parameter name.
Min (Minimum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the lower limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of “0”,
for example, means that when the slider is set to its lowest position the assigned parameter will also be set to its lowest value. A setting of “50” means
that the lowest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about 50% of
its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be set to
about 63).
If a controller is assigned to the “Min” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
136
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
DRUM KEY EDIT
Max (Maximum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the upper limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of
“100”, for example, means that when the slider is set to its highest position the
assigned parameter will also be set to its highest value. A setting of “80”
means that the highest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about
80% of its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be
set to about 102).
If a controller is assigned to the “Max” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
Additional (Additional MIDI control)
Range: 000 … 120, AfterTch, Velocity, KeyScale, LFO
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter allows MIDI control change numbers to be assigned to the
selected effect parameters, so that they can be controlled from the SY85 controllers (modulation wheel, foot controller, etc) or an external MIDI device that
is capable of transmitting control change messages. Additional settings include
“AfterTch” for keyboard aftertouch control, “Velocity” for keyboard velocity
control, “KeyScale” for key scaling control, and “LFO” for internal LFO control. This is in addition to control via the [CS1] and [CS2] sliders. MIDI control change numbers 000 through 120 can be assigned. Some control change
numbers are already defined, while others are not assigned to any specific
controller (see chart below).
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE NUMBER/DEVICE
0:
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
10:
11:
64:
65:
66:
67:
69:
“--------”
“Mod.Whl.”
“Breath C”
“Foot Cnt”
“Porta.Tm”
“Data Ent”
“Main Vol”
“Balance ”
“Panpot ”
“Express.”
“Hold 1 ”
“Porta.Sw”
“Sostenut”
“Soft
”
“Hold 2 ”
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
121:
122:
123:
124:
“Effect D”
“TremoloD”
“Chorus D”
“CelesteD”
“Phaser D”
“Inc.
”
“Dec.
”
“NRPN LSB”
“NRPN MSB”
“RPN LSB”
“RPN MSB”
“AfterTch”
“Velocity”
“KeyScale”
“LFO
”
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
137
10: CONTROL LFO
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 10:Control LFO → [ENTER/YES]
All of the modulation-type effects — chorus, flanging, etc. — require LFO control. The SY85 has an independent effect LFO that is set up by the following parameters.
EF`CTRL`LFO``Waveform````Speed````Delay`
``````````````∆˚∆`tri````````0````````0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Wave (LFO waveform)
Range: tri, dwn, up, squ, sin, S/H, 1tm
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the waveform of the effect LFO.
“tri” = Triangle.
“up” = Upward sawtooth.
“sin” = Sine.
“dwn” = Downward sawtooth.
“squ” = Square.
“S/H” = Sample and hold.
“1tm” = Upward 1-shot.
If a controller is assigned to the “Wave” parameter (page 136), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Speed (LFO speed)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the speed of the effect LFO.
“0” is the slowest speed setting, producing an LFO speed of approximately
0 Hertz. The fastest setting of 99 produces an LFO speed of approximately 25
Hertz.
If a controller is assigned to the “Speed” parameter (page 136), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Delay
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the delay time between the beginning of a note and the beginning of
effect LFO operation for the selected element.
The minimum setting “0” results in no delay, while the maximum setting of
“99” produces a delay of approximately 2.66 seconds before the effect LFO
begins operation.
If a controller is assigned to the “Delay” parameter (page 136), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
138
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
EFFECT DATA COPY
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [COPY]
This function facilitates drum voice effect editing by allowing the effect parameters from any other song, voice, or performance combination to be copied to the
current drum voice. You can copy an effect setup that is close to the type you want,
then edit it to produce the required sound.
EFFECT`COPY`````From
````````````````VCE``¡H8:DR`PTN
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From
Range: Any song, voice or performance combination
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS4], [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS4] slider to select the mode containing the desired voice and
effect data (“PFM” = PERFORMANCE, “VCE” = VOICE, and “MLT” =
MULTI). Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY
keys to select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected.
Use the GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM
keys to select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry
controls can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
EFFECT`COPY`````From
Are`you`sure`?``VCE``¡H8:DR`PTN
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the effect data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
effect edit mode.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
139
EFFECT SIGNAL FLOW DISPLAY
[VOICE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [SHIFT] + [F1] ~ [F3]
This function provides a graphic indication of the current effect system configuration while in the effect edit mode.
● Overall Effect Flow
EFFECT`FLOW`Ú`∏Á∏∏∏∏∏∏
Î`Ú`EF1=Rev.Room1
`Mode=`para`Ú`∏∏∏∏∏
Á∏∏`Ú`EF2=Rev.Basmnt
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 1 Configuration
EF1`Send1a>---[Room˜]------------◊ ->OUT1
`````````````````````````````````’-<DRY1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 2 Configuration
EF2`Send2a>---[Baseˆ]------------Ù->OUT2
`````````````````````````````````’-<DRY2
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [SHIFT] + [F1] to see the overall effect system signal flow. Press [SHIFT]
+ [F2] to see the effect 1 section configuration, and [SHIFT] + [F3] for the effect 2
section configuration.
Refer the to section beginning on page 254 for details on the effect system.
140
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
EFFECT EDIT
1: KEY DATA INITIALIZE
[VOICE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 1:Key Data Initialize → [ENTER/YES]
When you want to program a single drum key “from scratch,” rather than editing
an existing key, use this function to initialize all data for the specified drum key.
DRUM`JOB`Key`Initialize````````Key
`````````````````````<BD6`````>``C1``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use the [CS7] slider or the keyboard to enter the drum key you want to
initialize (C1 … C5), then press [ENTER/YES] to begin the initialize procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
DRUM`JOB`Key`Initialize````````Key
Are`you`sure`?```````<BD6`````>``C1
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
initialize operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel.
When the drum key data has been initialized, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to calling the key data initialize function.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
JOB
141
2: KEY DATA EXCHANGE
[VOICE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 2:Key Data Exchange → [ENTER/YES]
This function makes it simple to re-arrange you drum key layout by directly
exchanging the data between any two specifed drum keys.
DRUM`JOB`Exchange```<BD6`````><BD6`````>
``````````````````````C1```†¥```C1``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use the [CS5] and [CS7] sliders to select the drum keys to be exchanged
(C1 … C5), or use the keyboard to enter the keys after pressing the [F5] or
[F7] function key to move the cursor to the appropriate parameter.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the layer exchange procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
DRUM`JOB`Exchange```<BD6`````><BD6`````>
Are`you`sure`?````````C1```†¥```C1
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
key data exchange operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been exchanged, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to
calling the key data exchange function.
142
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
JOB
3: DRUM VOICE EDIT RECALL
[VOICE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 3:Recall → [ENTER/YES]
If you’re dissatisfied with the results of edits you’ve made to a drum voice, or
have accidentally lost track of changes made, use the DRUM VOICE EDIT RECALL
function to recall the pre-edit drum voice data from the SY85’s backup buffer
memory.
DRUM`JOB`Recall```````````````<DR`PTN``>
``
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the recall procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
DRUM`JOB`Recall```````````````<DR`PTN``>
Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
recall operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/NO]
to cancel.
When the original drum voice data has been recalled, “Completed!” will
appear briefly on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was
engaged prior to calling the performance drum voice edit recall function.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
JOB
143
4: DRUM VOICE INITIALIZE
[VOICE] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 2:Initialize → [ENTER/YES]
When you want to program a totally new drum voice “from scratch,” rather than
editing an existing voice, use this function to initialize all drum voice parameters.
DRUM`JOB`Initialize```````Type
````````````````````````````1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use [CS6] to select the type of drum voice to be initialized. Press [ENTER/
YES] to begin the initialize procedure. The following confirmation display will
appear:
DRUM`JOB`Initialize```````Type
Are`you`sure`?``````````````1
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
initialize operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel.
When the drum voice data has been initialized, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to calling the drum voice initialize function.
144
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
JOB
DRUM VOICE COMPARE
[SHIFT] + [STORE]
The drum voice compare function makes it possible to compare the sound of a
drum voice being edited with the same drum voice prior to editing.
The illustrations here are not available.
To temporarily recall the original drum voice data while editing, press the
[STORE] key while holding the [SHIFT] key. The [VOICE] LED will flash, indicating that the compare mode is engaged. Although you can select different edit mode
display screens, data cannot be edited in the compare mode. Press [EXIT/NO] to
return to the edit mode and the drum voice being edited.
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
COMPARE
145
DRUM VOICE STORE
[STORE]
When you’re satisfied with a new drum voice you’ve created in the drum voice
edit mode, use the store function described below to store the new voice to an internal or card memory location.
VOICE`STORE`(DRUM)```To
`````````````````````¡H8:DR`PTN
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
When you’ve finished editing, return to the normal play mode (press the
[VOICE] key), and before selecting a different voice press the [STORE] key.
You can now use the MEMORY, GROUP, and NUMBER keys to select the
memory location to which your new drum voice is to be stored.
Once the store location has been specified, press [ENTER/YES] to begin
the store procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
VOICE`STORE`(DRUM)```To
Are`you`sure`?```````¡H8:DR`PTN
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
store operation (which will erase all previous data in the specified memory
location), or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the voice data has been stored, “Completed!” will appear briefly on
the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior to
calling the store function.
146
DRUM VOICE EDIT MODE /
STORE
SONG EDIT MODE
1: VOICE SELECT
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Voice Select → [ENTER/YES]
Each SY85 “song” has an independent “multi setup” that can have up to 16
voices assigned to “instruments” 1 through 16. Each instrument is controlled via the
correspondingly numbered MIDI channel. This screen lets you select the voices that
are to be played via the various multi-setup channels.
MULTI`Voice`Select`1-`8```````<InitPerf>
P¡A1`P¡A1`P¡A1`P¡A1`P¡A1`P¡A1`P¡A1`P¡A1`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Voice Select 1… 16
k l
Range: off, Any voice or performance combination.
Controls: [SHIFT] + [ ]/[ ], MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS1] …
[CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
k
l
Only eight voice numbers are shown on the display at one time. Use the
PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys while holding the [SHIFT] key to switch between
multi instruments “1 … 8” and “9 … 16”. The currenty selected group of
voices is indicated on the upper display line.
After moving the cursor to the instrument you want to edit by pressing the
appropriate function key, use the same function key to toggle between PERFORMANCE or VOICE memory (“P” or “V” at the beginning of the voice
number). Then use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] keys to
select the memory area from which the voice is to be selected, and finally the
GROUP and PROGRAM keys to select the voice. Voices within the selected
memory bank can also be selected directy for each channel by the appropriate
CS sliders, the data entry dial, and the [-] and [+] keys.
The voices can individually turned on or off by using the [-] (off) and [+]
(on) keys while holding the [SHIFT] key.
The name of the currently selected voice is shown in the upper right corner
of the display.
148
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
2: VOLUME
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Volume → [ENTER/YES]
For optimum balance between the instruments in a multi setup, this screen allows
the volume of each voice to be adjusted individually.
MULTI`Volume```````1-`8```````<InitPerf>
`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Volume
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [SHIFT] + [
k
k ]/[l ], [CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
l
Only eight voice numbers are shown on the display at one time. Use the
PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys while holding the [SHIFT] key to switch between
multi instruments “1 … 8” and “9 … 16”. The currenty selected group of
voices is indicated on the upper display line.
Use the [CS1] through [CS8] sliders to adjust the volume levels of voices 1
through 8 or 9 through 16, respectively. The name of the currently selected
voice is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Voices that are turned
off are indicated by “---” on the display. A setting of “0” produces no sound,
while a setting of “127” produces maximum volume. The vertical bar graphs
next to each parameter provide a visual indication of volume levels — the
longer the bar the higher the volume.
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
149
3: PAN
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Pan → [ENTER/YES]
In a multi setup, interesting stereo effects can be produced by placing the output
from different voices at different locations in the stereo sound field. The parameters
in this screen determine the position in the stereo sound field in which the sound
from each active voice will be heard (left to right).
MULTI`Pan`L¯¯˘¯¯R`1-`8````````<InitPerf>
``+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Pan
k l ], [CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Range: -31 … +31, vce
Controls: [SHIFT] + [ ]/[
k
l
Only eight voice numbers are shown on the display at one time. Use the
PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys while holding the [SHIFT] key to switch between
multi instruments “1 … 8” and “9 … 16”. The currenty selected group of
voices is indicated on the upper display line.
Use the [CS1] through [CS8] sliders to adjust the pan positions of voices 1
through 8 or 9 through 16, respectively. The name of the currently selected
voice is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Voices that are turned
off are indicated by “---” on the display. Minus values represent panning to the
left, and positive values represent panning to the right. “0” positions the sound
of the selected layer in the center of the stereo sound field. The next setting
above “+31” is “vce.” When “vce” is selected the preset pan position for the
selected voice or performance combination is used. The upper line of the display also shows a graphic representation of the stereo sound field with “L”
representing “left” and “R” representing “right.” As you change the pan value
the vertical bar will appear at the corresponding position on the graphic display.
150
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
4: EFFECT SEND LEVEL
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Effect Send Level → [ENTER/YES]
The ability to individually adjust the effect send level for each voice in a multi
setup allows the optimum amount of effect to be applied to each voice.
MULTI`EF`SendLevel`1-`8```````<InitPerf>
`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ`127ƒ
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
SendLevel
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [SHIFT] + [
k
k ]/[l ], [CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
l
Only eight voice numbers are shown on the display at one time. Use the
PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys while holding the [SHIFT] key to switch between
multi instruments “1 … 8” and “9 … 16”. The currenty selected group of
voices is indicated on the upper display line.
Use the [CS1] through [CS8] sliders to adjust the effect send levels of
voices 1 through 8 or 9 through 16, respectively. The name of the currently
selected voice is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Voices that are
turned off are indicated by “---” on the display. A setting of “0” produces no
effect, while a setting of “127” produces maximum send level and therefore
maximum effect sound. The vertical bar graphs next to each parameter provide
a visual indication of send levels — the longer the bar the higher the send
level.
Please note that if the “Source” parameter in the “2: SEND SELECT &
LEVEL” screen (page 167) is set to “VCE” or “PFM” for any instrument, the
send level of that instrument cannot be changed. In this case “(vce)” will
appear on the display in place of the send level value.
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
151
5: NOTE SHIFT
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:Note Shift → [ENTER/YES]
Individually shifts the pitch of each active voice up or down in semitone steps.
MULTI`Note`Shift```1-`8```````<InitPerf>
``+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Note Shift
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [SHIFT] + [
k
l
k ]/[l ], [CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Only eight voice numbers are shown on the display at one time. Use the
PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys while holding the [SHIFT] key to switch between
multi instruments “1 … 8” and “9 … 16”. The currenty selected group of
voices is indicated on the upper display line.
Use the [CS1] through [CS8] sliders to shift the pitch of voices 1 through 8
or 9 through 16, respectively. The name of the currently selected voice is
shown in the upper right corner of the display. Voices that are turned off are
indicated by “---” on the display. A setting of “-12,” for example, shifts the
pitch of the selected layer down by one octave; a setting of “+4” shifts the
pitch up by a major third. Please note that note shift cannot be applied to
drum/percussion voices (the Note Shift value is fixed at “+0”).
The Note Shift parameter can be used to transpose a voice to its most
useful range, or to create harmony (intervals) between different voices in a
multi setup.
152
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
6: TUNE
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Tune → [ENTER/YES]
Allows slight upward or downward pitch adjustment of each active voice. More
than just simple tuning, the tune parameters make it possible to create sound-thickening detune effects between voices.
MULTI`Tune`````````1-`8```````<InitPerf>
``+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Tune (Fine tuning)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [SHIFT] + [
k
k ]/[l ], [CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
l
Only eight voice numbers are shown on the display at one time. Use the
PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys while holding the [SHIFT] key to switch between
multi instruments “1 … 8” and “9 … 16”. The currenty selected group of
voices is indicated on the upper display line.
Use the [CS1] through [CS8] sliders to fine tune voices 1 through 8 or 9
through 16, respectively. The name of the currently selected voice is shown in
the upper right corner of the display. Voices that are turned off are indicated
by “---” on the display. Each increment corresponds to approximately 1.17
cents (a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone). The maximum minus setting of “-63”
produces a downward pitch shift of almost three-quarters of a semitone, and the
maximum plus setting of “+63” produces an upward pitch shift of the same
amount. A setting of “0” produces no pitch change. Please note that tuning
cannot be applied to drum/percussion voices (the Tune value is fixed at “+0”).
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
153
7: EFFECT TYPE, OUT BALANCE
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 7:Effect Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a complex, high-performance effect system that can be programmed easily via the parameters presented here and in the following screen.
For a complete list of effect parameters see page 274.
MULTI`````Effect`Type````````Wet`Balance
``06:Rev.Stagel``57:EQ`->`Sym```50%``50%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Effect Type 1/2
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS1]/[CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS1] selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor, and [CS4] does the same for the EFFECT 2 processor. See page 254 for
more details on the SY85 effect system.
Wet Balance 1/2
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS7]/[CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS7] controls the balance between the direct no-effect sound and the effect
sound of the EFFECT 1 processor, while [CS8] does the same for the EFFECT
2 processor. The higher the value the deeper the effect. See page 254 for more
details on the SY85 effect system.
154
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
8: SONG NAME
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 8:Name → [ENTER/YES]
Your original songs should naturally have original names. This function can be
used to assign a name of up to 8 characters to the current song.
MULTI`Song`Name```````````````"InitSong"
[CLR][UPR][LWR][SPC]````````````[†]``[¥]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Name
Range: See character list, below
Controls: GROUP, PROGRAM, [F1] … [F4], [F7], [F8],
[CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Assigns a name of up to 8 characters to the current performance.
Use the [F7] function key to move the character cursor to the left, and the
[F8] function key to move the cursor to the right. Use the GROUP and PROGRAM keys to input a character at the cursor position. Each GROUP or PROGRAM key selects the three characters printed above it in sequence. It is also
possible to use the [-1] and [+1] keys or dial to scroll through the available
characters (see list below).
The sliders, [CS1] through [CS8], independently select characters for the
corresponding character position: [CS1] selects the first character, [CS2] selects
the second character, and so on.
The first four function keys also perform important functions: [F1] clears
the entire name, [F2] selects upper-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM
key entry, [F3] selects lower-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM key
entry, and [F4] inserts a space at the cursor position.
GROUP key
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
A → B → C
D → E → F
G → H → I
J → K → L
M → N → O
P → Q → R
S → T → U
V → W → X
PROGRAM key
[1]:
[2]:
[3]:
[4]:
[5]:
[6]:
[7]:
[8]:
Y → Z → 0
1 → 2 → 3
4 → 5 → 6
7 → 8 → 9
* → & → _
/ → . → ,
’ → ! → ?
# → : → ;
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
155
9: SONG INITIALIZE
[SONG] → [MULTI EDIT] → [MENU] → 9:Initialize → [ENTER/YES]
When you want to program a totally new multi setup “from scratch,” rather than
editing an existing setup, use this function to initialize all multi parameters.
MULTI`Initialize``````````````"InitSong"
````````````````````````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the initialize procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
MULTI`Initialize``````````````"InitSong"
Are`you`sure`?``````````````````````````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
initialize operation (which will erase all current edited data), or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel.
When the multi data has been initialized, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display, then the display will return to the mode that was engaged prior
to calling the multi initialize function.
156
SONG EDIT MODE /
MULTI EDIT
TRACK EDIT
[SONG] → [TRACK EDIT] → [A]~[H]
The track edit mode is used to edit material already recorded on the sequencer
tracks. Individual notes and other events can be deleted, changed, or inserted as
required, providing precise musical control.
`````Meas`Beat`Clock`C#3```(›)``mf```````
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24```61`0018```64`ERASE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The track edit mode has two sub-modes — change and insert — which will
be described below. Use the [F1] key to toggle between the change (“CHG” on
the display) and insert (“INS” on the display) modes. The change mode is
always selected when the track edit mode is initially engaged.
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
157
■ THE CHANGE MODE (Tracks 1 … 8)
Change edit (“CHG”) allows note, control change, program change, pitch bend,
and aftertouch data to be changed or erased as required.
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track you want to edit (A =
track1, B = track 2, etc.). The LED of the selected track will glow red while the
LEDs of all other tracks containing data glow green.
Use the data entry dial to step through the events on the selected track. The
displays and parameters corresponding to the various event types are described below.
When the event to be changed is located, use the appropriate slider to change it as
required (or move the cursor to the desired parameter by pressing the corresponding
function key and then use the [-] and [+] keys). The selected event can be erased by
pressing the [F8] key (“Top of Track”, “Measure Bar”, and “End of Track” can not
be deleted). After changing a value the [ENTER/YES] key must be pressed to actually enter the new value.
When done, press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the song mode menu.
● Top of the Track, Measure Dividers, & End of Track
`````Meas`Beat`Clock`==`Top`of`Track`==``
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24`````````````````````
`````Meas`Beat`Clock`==`Measure`Bar`==``
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24`````````````````````
`````Meas`Beat`Clock`==`End`of`Track`==``
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24`````````````````````
These displays indicated the beginning of the track, measure lines, and the
end of the track, respectively. Since they are not actually musical events, they
can not be edited.
158
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
● Notes
`````Meas`Beat`Clock`C#3```(›`)`mf```````
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24```61`0018```64`ERASE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Note events appear with three parameters:
•
The note itself, edited by [CS5]. Range: 0 (C-2) … 111 (D#7). The note
name appears on the upper display line while the corresponding MIDI note
number appears on then lower line. In addition to using [CS5] or the [-1]
and [+1] keys, note events can be change by pressing the desired key on
the keyboard while holding the [SHIFT] key.
•
The gate time of the note, edited by [CS6]. Range: 0000 (j) … 8190 (j).
The note length is shown graphically on the upper display line while the
corresponding length in clocks is shown on the lower line.
•
The velocity of the note, edited by [CS7]. Range: 1 (ppp) … 127 (fff). The
velocity is displayed in approximate musical dynamic markings on the
upper display line, while the corresponding MIDI velocity value is shown
on the lower line.
● Control Change
`````Meas`Beat`Clock``=`Control`Change`=
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24````1````2``````ERASE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Control change events appear with 2 parameters:
•
The control number, edited by [CS5]. Range: 0 … 120. This specifies what
controller was used (modulation wheel, foot controller, etc.).
•
The control value, edited by [CS6]. Range: 0 … 127. This specifies the
actual controller setting, and therefore how the sound is modified.
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
159
● Program Change
`````Meas`Beat`Clock``=`Program`Change`=
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24```````001``````ERASE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Program change events have a single parameter: the program change
number itself, edited via [CS6]. Range: 000 … 127. Program change numbers
normally specify a voice change.
● Pitch Bend
`````Meas`Beat`Clock``=`Pitch`Bend`=````
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24```````+07``````ERASE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Pitch change events appear with a single parameter: the new pitch bend
value, edited via [CS6]. Range: -64 … +63.
● Aftertouch
`````Meas`Beat`Clock``=`After`Touch`=```
`CHG``001`-`01`-`24`````````7``````ERASE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Aftertouch events appear with a single parameter: the new aftertouch value,
edited via [CS6]. Range: 0 … 127. The effect of aftertouch events depends on
how aftertouch control is assigned in the voice edit mode.
160
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
● The Meas, Beat, and Clock Parameters
These three parameters are common to all the displays described above. In
addition to indicating the location of the current event, they can be edited to
move the event as required:
•
The “Meas” parameter, edited via [CS2], indicates the number of the current measure. Range: 001 … 999. The length of each measure depends on
the time signature of the song.
•
The “Beat” parameter, edited via [CS3], indicates the current beat within
the current measure. The value of each beat and the number of beats in
each measure depend on the selected time signature. If the time signature is
4/4, for example, each beat will equal one quarter-note, and there will be
four beats per measure. If the time signature is 6/8, however, each beat will
equal an eighth-note, and there will be six beats per measure.
•
The “Clock” parameter, edited via [CS4], indicates the current clock within
the current beat within the current measure. There are 48 clocks per quarter
note, 24 per eighth note, 12 per sixteenth note, and so on.
If the “Top of Track”, “Measure Bar”, or “End of Track” display is showing, changing these parameters and pressing the [ENTER/YES] key takes you
directly to the specified location.
■ THE INSERT MODE (Tracks 1 … 8)
Insert edit (INS) allows note, control change, program change, pitch bend, and
aftertouch events to be inserted at any point in the sequencer tracks.
Normally, the insert mode is entered by pressing the [F1] key after locating the
desired insert point in the change mode. The type of event to be inserted can then be
selected by pressing the [F8] key until the desired event appears on the display
(“NOTE” = note; “CTRL” = control change; “PGM” = program change; “PB” = pitch
bend; “AT” = aftertouch). The various event types have the same parameters and
ranges as in the change mode (see above). Set the parameters for the selected event
as required, then press the [ENTER/YES] key to insert the event.
The insert location can be changed while in the insert mode by using the data
entry dial. The [F3] key determines whether the dial changes the measure (“MEAS”),
beat (“BEAT”), or clock (“CLOCK”) value.
Press the [F1] key to return to the change mode, or the [EXIT/NO] key to return
to the song play mode.
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
161
■ RHYTHM TRACK EDIT
When the track edit mode is engaged while the rhythm track (track 9) is selected,
or when the rhythm track is selected while the track edit mode is engaged, the following display will appear:
SONG`EDIT```````````````````````````````
Part:`001=`ptn``***`[INS][DEL][CPY][SCH]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
This initial display allows any existing rhythm part to be selected via [CS2]
(001 … 999), the event located at that part to be changed via [CS3], and the
parameter asociated with the event to be changed via [CS4]. The various event
types and their parameters are as follows:
• ptn (Pattern number)
Use [CS4] to select a different pattern number as required (P00 … P99 or
I00 … I99).
• ||: (Begin repeat)
This symbol indicates the beginning of a range of rhythm parts to be repeated. The begin repeat event has no other parameter.
• :|| (End repeat)
A “||:” must always be followed at some point by a “:||” symbol signifying
the end of the range of parts to be repeated. Use [CS4] to set the number of
times the specified section is to be repeated (x00 … x99).
• vol (Volume change)
This event produces a volume change at the selected part. The [CS4] slider
sets the new volume level (0 … 127).
162
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
• tmp (Tempo change)
This event indicates a tempo change to occur over a specified number of
beats. The numbers above the [CS4] slider define the tempo change: the
number to the left of the slash (-99 … 0 … +99, or atmp for “a tempo”) sets
the number of beats per minute by which the tempo will decrease or increase,
and the number to the right of the slash (0 … 99) sets the number of beats
from the “tmp” mark over which the change will occur. A setting of “+20/8”,
for example, would increase the tempo by 20 beats per minute over 8 beats (2
measures of 4/4 time). The [F4] function key is used to toggle the cursor
between the left and right numbers, and [CS4] is used to change the selected
number.
• mark (Search mark)
This sets one of 16 markers to be used by the rhythm track search function
described on page 165. [CS4] is used to specify the marker (A … P).
The [F5] through [F8] function keys are used to access the rhythm track
edit functions described below:
● [F5]: “INS” = Rhythm Track Insert
SONG`EDIT`Insert`Part```````````````````
`Part:001=`ptn``***`````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
This function is used to insert a new part at any point in an existing rhythm
track. Press [F5] to engage the rhythm track insert function after locating the
desired insert point via the main rhythm track edit screen, described above.
Then use [CS3] and [CS4] to specify the event to be inserted. The event types
that can be inserted and their parameters are exactly the same as those described for the main rhythm track edit screen, above. Once the event to be
inserted has been specified, press [ENTER/YES] to begin the insert procedure.
The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`EDIT`Insert`Part`````Are`you`sure`?
`Part:001=`ptn``***`````````````````````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
insert operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the event has been inserted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display, then the display will return to the main rhythm track edit mode.
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
163
● [F6]: “DEL” = Rhythm Track Delete
SONG`EDIT`Delete`Part```````````````````
`Part:001=`ptn``***`````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
This function is used to delete a part from an existing rhythm track. Press
[F6] to engage the rhythm track delete function after locating the part to be
deleted via the main rhythm track edit screen, described above. The following
confirmation display will appear:
SONG`EDIT`Delete`Part`````Are`you`sure`?
`Part:001=`ptn``***`````````````````````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
delete operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the part has been deleted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display, then the display will return to the main rhythm track edit mode.
● [F7]: “CPY” = Rhythm Track Copy
SONG`EDIT`Copy`Part```````from``````To``
`Part:001=`ptn``***```````001ø`001``001`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
This function is used to copy a part or a range of parts to any other point
in a rhythm track. Press [F7] to engage the rhythm track copy function. Then
use [CS6] to select the number of the first part in the range of parts to be
copied (001 … 999), [CS7] to select the number of the last part in the range of
parts to be copied (001 … 999), and [CS8] to select the part number to which
the source parts will be copied (001 … 999). Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the
copy procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
164
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
SONG`EDIT`Copy`Part```````Are`you`sure`?
`Part:001=`ptn``***```````001ø`001``001`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
copy operation (which will overwite existing parts from the destination part
number), or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the parts have been copied, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display, then the display will return to the main rhythm track edit mode.
● [F8]: “SCH” = Rhythm Track Search
SONG`EDIT`Search`Mark```````````````````
```A````B````C````D````E````F````G````H`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
This function makes it possible to directly locate “marks” entered in the
track using the “mark” event in the main rhythm track edit screen. The
[SHIFT] key is used to toggle between marks A through H and I through G.
Square brackets appear around marks that exist within the rhythm track. To go
directly to a marked location, simply press the function key immediately below
the desired mark. The main rhythm track edit screen will appear with the
marked part selected.
If you select a mark that has not been specified, “Mark Not Used!” will
appear on the display. Press [EXIT/No] to return to the Search Mark display.
SONG EDIT MODE /
TRACK EDIT
165
1: MODE, TYPE
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 1:Mode, Type → [ENTER/YES]
The SY85 features a dual-processor effect system that includes 90 top-quality
digital effects. Two different effects can be connected in series or parallel, providing
an extensive range of possible configurations.
EF`Mode`````EF1`Type```````EF2`Type`````
```2:para```06:Rev.Stagel``57:EQ`->`Sym`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Mode
Range: 0:off, 1:seri, 2:para
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the SY85’s two effect processors are connected in
series (“1:seri”) or in parallel (“2:para”), or whether the entire effect system is
turned off (“0:off”).
EF1 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 1 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
EF2 Type
Range: 0 … 90
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects any of the SY85’s 90 effect types for the EFFECT 2 processor. See
page 254 for more details on the SY85 effect system, and page 274 for a
complete list of the available effects.
166
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
2: SEND SELECT & LEVEL
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 2:Send → [ENTER/YES]
The parameters provided here determine to which of the SY85 effect stages the
output from the voice assigned to each layer is sent, and at what level. It is also
possible to control the effect send level via keyboard dynamics and key scaling.
EF`Send<InitSong>`Source``Switch````Levl
``Inst=`1(P¡A1)``````MLT``1a/-`2a/b``127
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Inst (Instrument)
Range: 1 … 16
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the multi instrument to be edited. The name of the voice assigned to
the selected instrument is shown between parentheses on the upper line of the
display.
Source
Range: MLT, VCE, PFM
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
When “MLT” is selected the “Switch” and “Levl” parameters, described
below, can be applied to the selected instrument. If a voice is assigned to the
selected instrument, the “Source” parameter can also be set to “VCE”, causing
the switch and send levels of the assigned voice to be used. In the same way,
if a performance combination is assigned to the selected instrument, the
“Source” parameter can be set to “PFM”, causing the switch and send levels of
the assigned performance combination to be used. If “VCE” or “PFM” is selected, the “Switch” and “Levl” parameters cannot be edited (“----” appears in
place of the parameters).
Switch 1a, 1b/2a, 2b
Range: See text below.
Controls: [CS6]/[CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines to which of the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 effect stages the
output from the current layer is sent. Each time the [F6] or [F7] function key is
pressed, the cursor alternately moves to the corresponding “a” or “b” parameter.
The [-1] and [+1] keys can then be used to turn the stage on (“a” or “b”) or
off (“.”). The [CS6] and [CS7] sliders select the following settings in sequence:
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
167
CS6 (EFFECT 1)
1./.
1a/.
1a/b
1./b
(a
(a
(a
(a
and b off)
on, b off)
and b on)
off, b on)
CS7 (EFFECT 2)
2./.
2a/.
2a/b
2./b
(a
(a
(a
(a
and b off)
on, b off)
and b on)
off, b on)
If a “single” type effect is selected then only stage “a” can be selected. If a
“cascade” type effect is selected, then only stage “b” can be selected. If a
“dual” type effect is selected, then both stages “a” and “b” can be selected. An
effect stage that cannot be selected is represented by “-” on the display.
Levl (Send level)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter adjusts the amount of direct voice signal that is sent to the
effect processors, determining the strength of the final effect sound. A setting
of “0” results in no effect, leaving only the “dry” sound. The maximum setting
of “127” produces the maximum amount of effect.
168
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
3: INST DRY OUTPUT SELECT
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 3:Inst Dry Out Select → [ENTER/YES]
OUTPUT`Select`<InitSong>`Dry1`Dry2``````
``Inst=`1(P¡A1)````````````on```on``````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Inst (Instrument)
Range: 1 … 16
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the multi instrument to be edited. The name of the voice assigned to
the selected instrument is shown between parentheses on the upper line of the
display.
Dry1
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns the “dry line” bypassing the EFFECT 1 signal processor on or off.
When this parameter is turned “off,” the “WET:DRY BALANCE” parameters
(page 171) have no effect.
Dry2
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns the “dry line” bypassing the EFFECT 2 signal processor on or off.
When this parameter is turned “off,” the “WET:DRY BALANCE” parameters
(page 171) have no effect.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
169
4: OUTPUT LEVEL
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 4:Output Level → [ENTER/YES]
Depending on the selected effects the SY85 effect system can have up to four
separate output levels that are adjusted by the parameters provided in this screen.
EF`OutLevel`1a```1b`````````````2a```2b`
`EF1(sngl)=100%``--``EF2(casc)=`--``100%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
1a, 1b, 2a, and 2b (Effect output levels)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS3], [CS4], [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
The [CS3] and [CS4] sliders adjust the output levels of the effect 1 “1a”
and “1b” stages, respectively, while the [CS7] and [CS8] sliders adjust the
output levels of the effect 2 “2a” and “2b” stages. A setting of “0” turns output
from the corresponding effect stage off, while a setting of “100” produces
maximum output level.
If the selected effect is a “single” type, then only the “1a” or “2a” output
level is available. If it is a “cascade” type, then only the “1b” or “2b” output
level is available. Both the “1a” and “1b” or “2a” and “2b” levels are available
only if the selected effect is a “dual” type. The type of the effects currently
selected for the effect 1 and effect 2 processors are shown in parentheses on
the bottom line of the display. See page 254 for details on the effect stages and
the SY85 effect system in general.
If a controller is assigned to any of the output level parameters (page 174),
an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
170
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
5: WET:DRY BALANCE
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 5:Wet:Dry Balance → [ENTER/YES]
The balance between the direct sound of the voice and the effect sound is a
delicate thing. Even slight changes can make a big difference to the final sound. The
parameters provided in this screen provide precise balance control.
EF`Wet:Dry`Balance``````````````````````
`````Out1=``50`:`50``````Out2=``50`:`50`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Out1 Wet/Out2 Wet
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS3]/[CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters and the corresponding “Out1 Dry” and “Out2 Dry” parameters, below, work together to balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”)
signals delivered via the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT2 processors. Higher “Wet”
values produce more effect sound in relation to the direct, dry sound of the
voice.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
If a controller is assigned to the “Out1 Wet” or “Out2 Wet” parameter
(page 174), an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Out1 Dry/Out2 Dry
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4]/[CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters and the corresponding “Out1 Wet” and “Out2 Wet” parameters, above, work together to balance the effect (“wet”) and direct (“dry”)
signals delivered via the EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 processors, respectively.
Higher “Dry” values produce more direct, dry sound in relation to the effect
sound.
Although the “Wet” and “Dry” parameters can be set independently, adjusting one will cause the other to change so that their total is always 100(%).
If a controller is assigned to the “Out1 Dry” or “Out2 Dry” parameter (page
174), an inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
171
6: SEND & EFFECT 2 MIX LEVEL
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 6:Mix Level → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters determine the mix level between each effect send and the output
of the preceding effect stage. Refer to the section beginning on page 254 for details
on the overall SY85 effect system.
EF`Mix`Level```EF2``Insert`1b```2a```2b`
````````````````--`````````--```--````0%
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
EF2 Mix (Effect 2 mix level)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Mixes the output of the EFFECT 2 processor with that of the EFFECT 1
processor. This parameter can only be used with the “serial” effect mode is
selected. If any other mode is selected (“off” or “para”), “---” appears on the
display in place of the value.
If a controller is assigned to the EF2 Mix parameter (page 174), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Send 1b, 2a, 2b (Send level)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
These parameters mix the dry signal sent to the corresponding effect stage
with the output of the preceding effect stage. The higher the value the greater
mix level. If the current effect configuration does not allow one of these mix
parameters, “--” will appear in place of the mix level parameter.
If a controller is assigned to the one of these parameters (page 174), an
inverse “c” will appear to the right of the parameter. SONG EFFECT
172
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
7: EFFECT 1 PARAMETERS
8: EFFECT 2 PARAMETERS
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 7:EF1 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
→ 8:EF2 Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
Each of the SY85’s 90 effects has 8 parameters that can be edited via the parameters in this screen to fine-tune the effect.
EF1`PARAM`<Rev.Stagel>```)Rev.Time``[S](
`2.5``1.0```10```32```16````4```45`12.0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Each parameter is controlled by the corresponding slider (i.e. the slider
immediately below each parameter). The [-1]/[+1] keys and data entry dial can
also be used to edit the parameter at which the cursor is currently located.
Refer to page 274 for a complete listing of the parameters provided for
each effect.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
173
9: CONTROL PARAMETERS
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 9:Control Parameter → [ENTER/YES]
The parameters provided in this screen determine which effect parameters are to
be controlled by the minimum and maximum parameter values and assign MIDI
control numbers to the same parameters for MIDI effect control.
EF`CTRL)````````(`Min``Max``Controller``
````1`:`off````````0%`100%`000:off``````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
CTRL1/CTRL2 (CTRL1/CTRL2 switch)
Range: 1, 2
Controls: [CS1], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects CTRL1 or CTRL2 for assignment.
Parameter (Effect parameter)
Range: Depends on selected effects.
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the effect parameter to be controlled by the currently selected slider.
Since each effect has as many as 8 different parameters, the maximum number
of settings available for this parameter will be 8: “Ef1prm1” through “Ef1prm8”
on the display, for example, stands for “effect 1 parameter 1” through “effect 1
parameter 8”. The parameters available for each effect are different, but the
name of the selected parameter will be shown between the parentheses on the
top line of the display. Parameters that can not be assigned to the sliders are
indicated by dashes (“--------”) instead of a parameter name.
Min (Minimum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the lower limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of “0”,
for example, means that when the slider is set to its lowest position the assigned parameter will also be set to its lowest value. A setting of “50” means
that the lowest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about 50% of
its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be set to
about 63).
If a controller is assigned to the “Min” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
174
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
Max (Maximum parameter value)
Range: 0 … 100
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the upper limit of the [CS1] or [CS2] control range. A setting of
“100”, for example, means that when the slider is set to its highest position the
assigned parameter will also be set to its highest value. A setting of “80”
means that the highest slider position will set the assigned parameter to about
80% of its range (a parameter with a range of 0 to 127, for example, would be
set to about 102).
If a controller is assigned to the “Max” parameter, an inverse “c” will
appear to the right of the parameter.
Controller (Control device number)
Range: 000 … 120, AfterTch, Velocity, KeyScale, LFO
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter allows MIDI control change numbers to be assigned to the
selected effect parameters, so that they can be controlled from the SY85 controllers (modulation wheel, foot controller, etc) or an external MIDI device that
is capable of transmitting control change messages. Additional settings include
“AfterTch” for keyboard aftertouch control, “Velocity” for keyboard velocity
control, “KeyScale” for key scaling control, and “LFO” for internal LFO control. This is in addition to control via the [CS1] and [CS2] sliders. MIDI control change numbers 000 through 120 can be assigned. Some control change
numbers are already defined, while others are not assigned to any specific
controller (see chart below).
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE NUMBER/DEVICE
0:
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
10:
11:
64:
65:
66:
67:
69:
“--------”
“Mod.Whl.”
“Breath C”
“Foot Cnt”
“Porta.Tm”
“Data Ent”
“Main Vol”
“Balance ”
“Panpot ”
“Express.”
“Hold 1 ”
“Porta.Sw”
“Sostenut”
“Soft
”
“Hold 2 ”
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
121:
122:
123:
124:
“Effect D”
“TremoloD”
“Chorus D”
“CelesteD”
“Phaser D”
“Inc.
”
“Dec.
”
“NRPN LSB”
“NRPN MSB”
“RPN LSB”
“RPN MSB”
“AfterTch”
“Velocity”
“KeyScale”
“LFO
”
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
175
10: CONTROL LFO
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [MENU] → 10:Control LFO → [ENTER/YES]
All of the modulation-type effects — chorus, flanging, etc. — require LFO control. The SY85 has an independent effect LFO that is set up by the following parameters.
EF`CTRL`LFO``Waveform````Speed````Daley`
``````````````Ω≈ç`sin````````0````````0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Wave (LFO waveform)
Range: tri, dwn, up, squ, sin, S/H, 1tm
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines the waveform of the effect LFO.
“tri” = Triangle.
“up” = Upward sawtooth.
“sin” = Sine.
“dwn” = Downward sawtooth.
“squ” = Square.
“S/H” = Sample and hold.
“1tm” = Upward 1-shot.
If a controller is assigned to the “Wave” parameter (page 174), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Speed (LFO speed)
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the speed of the effect LFO.
“0” is the slowest speed setting, producing an LFO speed of approximately
0 Hertz. The fastest setting of 99 produces an LFO speed of approximately 25
Hertz.
If a controller is assigned to the “Speed” parameter (page 174), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
Delay
Range: 0 … 99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the delay time between the beginning of a note and the beginning of
effect LFO operation for the selected element.
The minimum setting “0” results in no delay, while the maximum setting of
“99” produces a delay of approximately 2.66 seconds before the effect LFO
begins operation.
If a controller is assigned to the “Delay” parameter (page 174), an inverse
“c” will appear to the right of the parameter.
176
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
EFFECT DATA COPY
[SONG] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [EFFECT COPY]
This function facilitates song editing by allowing the effect parameters from any
other song, voice, or performance combination to be copied to the current song. You
can copy an effect setup that is close to the type you want, then edit it to produce
the required sound.
EFFECT`COPY`````From````````````````````
````````````````MLT```01:InitSong```````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From
Range: Any song, voice or performance combination
Controls: MEMORY, GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS4], [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS4] slider to select the mode containing the desired voice and
effect data (“PFM” = PERFORMANCE, “VCE” = VOICE, and “MLT” =
MULTI). Use the [INTERNAL 1], [INTERNAL 2], and [CARD] MEMORY
keys to select the memory area from which the source voice is to be selected.
Use the GROUP keys to select the source voice bank, then use the PROGRAM
keys to select the source voice number. The [CS5] slider and other data entry
controls can also be used to select the source voice number.
Once the source voice has been selected, press the [ENTER/YES] key. “Are
you sure?” will appear on the display.
EFFECT`COPY`````From````````````````````
Are`you`sure`?``MLT```01:InitSong```````
Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to copy the effect data, or press [EXIT/
NO] to cancel the copy operation. Once the copy operation has finished, “Completed!” will appear on the display briefly, then the display will return to the
effect edit mode.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
177
EFFECT SIGNAL FLOW DISPLAY
[PERFORMANCE] → [EFFECT EDIT] → [SHIFT] + [F1] ~ [F3]
This function provides a graphic indication of the current effect system configuration while in the effect edit mode.
● Overall Effect Flow
EFFECT`FLOW`Ú`∏Á∏∏∏∏∏∏
Î`Ú`EF1=Rev.Stage1
`Mode=`para`Ú`ØØØØØËÔÁ `Ú`EF2`EQ`->`Sym
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 1 Configuration
EF1`Send1a>---[Stge˜]------------◊ ->OUT1
`````````````````````````````````’-<DRY1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● Effect 2 Configuration
EF2`Send2a>---[EQ```]-Ÿ-[Sym`˜]--◊ ->OUT2
````Send2b>-----------Û``````````’-<DRY2
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [SHIFT] + [F1] to see the overall effect system signal flow. Press [SHIFT]
+ [F2] to see the effect 1 section configuration, and [SHIFT] + [F3] for the effect 2
section configuration.
Refer the to section beginning on page 254 for details on the effect system.
178
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG EFFECT
1: CLEAR SONG
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 1:Clear Song → [ENTER/YES]
→ [1]
→ [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 1:Clear Song → [ENTER/YES]
Entirely clears all songs or just the currently selected song (one song) from
memory.
SONG`JOB`Clear`Song`````````````````````
[ONE]`ALL````<InitSong>`````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
ONE, ALL
Range: ONE, ALL
Controls: [F1], [F2]
Press [F1] if you want to clear the currently selected song, or [F2] if you
want to clear all songs in memory. If you select “ONE” song, the current song
name is shown between parentheses on the lower display line.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the clear procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Clear`Song```````Are`you`sure`?
[ONE]`ALL````<InitSong>`````````````````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
clear operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the song data has been cleared, “Completed!” will appear briefly on
the display.
In addition to clearing all sequencer data for the current song, the clear
function initializes the following parameters:
Song name: “InitSong”
Tempo:
120
Time signature:
4/4
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
179
2: COPY SONG
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 2:Copy Song → [ENTER/YES]
→ [1]
→ [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 2:Copy Song → [ENTER/YES]
Copies all song data from one song to any other. This can be handy if you want
to make minor changes to an existing song while retaining a copy of the original
song data.
SONG`JOB`Copy`Song`````````````From`To``
`````````````<InitSong>````````S01``S01`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From
Range: 01 … 10
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
To
Range: 01 … 10
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS7] slider to select the “From” or source song number (1 … 10),
and the [CS8] slider to select the “To” or desination song number. The name of
the currently selected “From” or “To” song is shown between parentheses on
the lower display line, depending on which parameter the cursor is positioned
below.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the copy procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Copy`Song````````Are`you`sure`?
`````````````<InitSong>````````S01``S01`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
copy operation (which will overwrite all data in the “To” song number), or
press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the song data has been copied, “Completed!” will appear briefly on
the display.
180
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
3: MEMORY STATUS
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 3:Memory Status → [ENTER/YES]
Indicates the amount of memory available for song recording.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected. The
“CLEAR RHYTHM TRACK” job described on page 182 appears in its place.
SONG`JOB`Memory`Status`````````Free=100%
````````````````````````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
A display of “Free=80%”, for example, means that approximately 20% of
the available memory has been used, and approximately 80% is available for
further recording.
A “Memory full” error message may appear during recording even if this
function does not indicate “Free=0%”. This is because a certain amount of free
“work area’ is required by each function, and the memory can never be occupied entirely by song data.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
181
3: CLEAR RHYTHM TRACK
[SONG] → [1] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 3:Clear Rhythm Track → [ENTER/YES]
Deletes all data from the rhythm track.
This job appears in place of the “MEMORY STATUS” job, described on the
previous page, when the rhtyhm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Clear`Rhythm`Track
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the delete procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Clear`Rhythm`Track
Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
delete operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the rhythm track has been deleted, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
182
SONG EDIT MODE /
RHYTHM TRACK SONG JOB
4: TRACK MIXDOWN
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 4:Track Mixdown → [ENTER/YES]
Combines the data from two different tracks and copies the result to a third track.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Track`Mixdown````From``````To``
``````````````````````````TR1+`TR1¥`TR1`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From (From track 1 + track 2)
Range: 1 … 8
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
To
Range: 1 … 8
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS6] slider to select the first “From” (source) track and the [CS7]
slider to select the second source track. The data from the first and second
source tracks will be combined and copied to the “To” (destination) track,
selected by the [CS8] slider.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the mixdown procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Track`Mixdown````From``````To``
Are`you`sure`?````````````TR1+`TR1¥`TR1`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
mixdown operation (which will overwrite all data in the “To” track), or press
[EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been mixed and copied, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
The mixdown function is most useful when you want to record more than 8
individual parts. Successfully recorded parts can be combined using this function, thus opening up more tracks for further recording. The data in the source
tracks is not erased during a mixdown operation.
Please note that if both source tracks are set to the same track number, the
data from that track will simply be copied to the destination track.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
183
The illustrations here are not available.
184
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
5: DELETE TRACK
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 5:Delete Track → [ENTER/YES]
Deletes all data from the specified track.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Delete`Track```````````````````
````````````````````````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track you want to delete
(A = track1, B = track 2, and so on). The LED of the selected track will glow
red while the LEDs of all other tracks containing data glow green.
Press
[ENTER/YES] to begin the delete procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Delete`Track```````````````````
``````````````````````````Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
delete operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the track has been deleted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
185
6: QUANTIZE
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 6:Quantize → [ENTER/YES]
Aligns notes in the specified track to the nearest specified beat.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Quantize`````````Meas`````Size`
``````````````````````````001ø`001`1/48`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Size
Range: 1/48, 1/32, 1/24, 1/16, 1/12, 1/8, 1/6, 1/4
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track you want to
quantize (A = track1, B = track 2, and so on). The LED of the selected track
will glow red while the LEDs of all other tracks containing data glow green.
Use the [CS6] and [CS7] sliders to select the numbers of the first and last
measures in the range of measures you want to quantize, and use the [CS8]
slider to select the quantize size.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the quantize procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Quantize`````````Meas`````Size`
Are`you`sure`?````````````001ø`001`1/48`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
quantize operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been quantized, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
186
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
Quantization is generally used to tighten up sloppy timing. Use it judiciously, however, because timing that is too perfect can sound cold and mechanical — unless, of course, you’re specifically aiming for a cold, mechanical
feel. Always use a quantize value that is at least as “short” as the shortest
notes in the track to be quantized. If you quantize a track containing 16th notes
to 1/8 (8th notes), for example, some of the 16th notes will be aligned with 8th
note beats, thus ruining the track.
The various quantize values correspond to note lengths as follows:
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
187
7: COPY MEASURE
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 7:Copy Measure → [ENTER/YES]
Copies a specified measure or range of measures from one track to the specified
measure in another track.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Copy```From`Meas``````To`Meas``
`````````````1Ê(TR1``001ø`001)`TR1``001`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From Meas (Source measure range, track, copy count)
Range: Measures: 001 … 999. Track: TR1 … TR8. Count: 1x … 99x
Controls: [CS3] … [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
To Meas (Destination track & measure)
Range: Track: TR1 … TR8. Measure: 001 … 999.
Controls: [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS4] to specify the track from which the data is to be copied, [CS5]
and [CS6] to select the first and last measures of the range to be copied, and
[CS3] to specify the number of times the selected data is to be copied. Use
[CS7] to specify the destination track, and [CS8] to specify the destination
measure.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the copy procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Copy```From`Meas`Are`you`sure`?
`````````````1Ê(TR1``001ø`001)`TR1``001`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
copy operation (which will overwrite data in the destination track), or press
[EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been copied, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
A copy operation overwrites the data from the beginning of the specified
destination measure with the data from the source measure(s). Previous data in
the overwritten measures is therefore lost.
188
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
The illustrations here are not available.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
189
8: DELETE MEASURE
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 8:Delete Measure → [ENTER/YES]
Deletes the specified measure or range of measures from all tracks.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Delete`Measure````````Meas`````
`````````(`TR1ø8`All`)`````````001ø`001`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [CS7] and [CS8] sliders to select the numbers of the first and last
measures in the range of measures you want to delete.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the delete procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Delete`Measure```Are`you`sure`?
`````````(`TR1ø8`All`)`````````001ø`001`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
delete operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been deleted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
It’s important to remember that a delete operation affects all tracks simultaneously, and that measures following the deleted range are moved back to take
the place of the deleted measures.
190
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
9: INSERT MEASURE
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 9:Insert Measure → [ENTER/YES]
Inserts a specified measure or range of measures from all tracks before any other
specified measure.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Insert`Measure```From``````To``
`````````(`TR1ø8`All`)````001`ø001``001`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From (Source measure range)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
To (Destination measure)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS6] and [CS7] to specify the first and last measures in the range to
be copied, and [CS8] to select the destination measure number at which the
source data will be inserted.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the insert procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Insert`Measure```Are`you`sure`?
`````````(`TR1ø8`All`)````001`ø001``001`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
insert operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been inserted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
Insert affects all tracks simultaneously. The source measure or range of
measures in inserted before the specified destination measure.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
191
10: ERASE MEASURE
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 10:Erase Measure → [ENTER/YES]
Erases all note and event data from the specified measure or range of measures in
the specified track.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Erase`Measure`````````Meas`````
```````````````````````````````001ø`001`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track containing the
measures you want to erase (A = track1, B = track 2, and so on). The LED of
the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all other tracks containing
data glow green.
Use the [CS7] and [CS8] sliders to select the numbers of the first and last
measures in the range of measures you want to erase.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the erase procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Erase`Measure`````````Meas`````
Are`you`sure`?`````````````````001ø`001`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
erase operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been erased, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
An erase operation leaves the specified measures intact but blank.
192
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
11: REMOVE EVENT
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 11:Remove Event → [ENTER/YES]
Allows pitch bend, after touch, program change, or control change events (data) to
be removed from a specified measure or range of measures in a specified track.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Remove`````Event``````Meas`````
``````````````````````PB```````001ø`001`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Event (Event type & No. if “ctrl” selected)
Range: PB, AT, crtl, pgm
Controls: [CS5], [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS7], [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track containing the
measures from which you want to remove events (A = track1, B = track 2, and
so on). The LED of the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all
other tracks containing data glow green.
Use [CS5] to select the type of event to remove: “ctrl” for control change,
“pgm” for program change, “AT” for aftertouch, and “PB” for pitch bend.
Removing a program change (“pgm”) event also removes control change
number 0 and 32 (bank select). If “ctrl” is selected, [CS6] can be used to
specify a control number to be removed (see below). Use the [CS7] and [CS8]
sliders to select the numbers of the first and last measures in the range of
measures from which the specified event data is to be removed.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the remove event procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Remove`````Event``````Meas`````
Are`you`sure`?````````PB```````001ø`001`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
remove event operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been removed, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
193
● Control Change Numbers
If you choose to remove control change events — modulation wheel, breath
controller, volume, etc. — you must also specify the control change number corresponding to the specific event you want to remove. For your reference, the following
is a list of assigned controllers:
MIDI CONTROL CHANGE NUMBER
0:
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
10:
11:
64:
65:
66:
67:
69:
194
SONG EDIT MODE /
“--------”
“Mod.Whl.”
“Breath C”
“Foot Cnt”
“Porta.Tm”
“Data Ent”
“Main Vol”
“Balance ”
“Panpot ”
“Express.”
“Hold 1 ”
“Porta.Sw”
“Sostenut”
“Soft
”
“Hold 2 ”
SONG JOB
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
“Effect D”
“TremoloD”
“Chorus D”
“CelesteD”
“Phaser D”
“Inc.
”
“Dec.
”
“NRPN LSB”
“NRPN MSB”
“RPN LSB”
“RPN MSB”
12: CLOCK MOVE
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 12:Clock Move → [ENTER/YES]
Moves all notes and events in the specified track and range of measures forward
or backward by the specified number of “clocks.”
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Clock`Move```````Meas`````Clock
``````````````````````````001ø`001`+000`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Clock
Range: -999 … +999
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track on which the
clock move operation is to be performed (A = track1, B = track 2, and so on).
The LED of the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all other tracks
containing data glow green.
Use [CS6] and [CS7] to specify the first and last measure numbers in the
range of measures over which you want to shift the timing of note and event
data. Use [CS8] to set the number of clocks by which the data will be moved
forward or backward. Minus (-) values move the data backward (toward the
beginning of the song) while plus (+) values move the data forward (toward the
end of the song). Each “clock” is equal to 1/48th of a quarter note.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the clock move procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Clock`Move```````Meas`````Clock
Are`you`sure`?````````````001ø`001`+000`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
clock move operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been moved, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
195
13: TRANSPOSE
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 13:Transpose → [ENTER/YES]
Transposes all notes in the specified track and range of measures up or down by
the specified “offset” in semitones.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Transpose````````Meas``````Ofst
``````````````````````````001ø`001```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Ofst (Offset)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track on which the
transpose operation is to be performed (A = track1, B = track 2, and so on).
The LED of the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all other tracks
containing data glow green.
Use [CS6] and [CS7] to specify the first and last measure numbers in the
range of measures over which you want to transpose note data. Use [CS8] to
set the number of semitones by which the notes will be transposed up or down.
Minus (-) values transpose down while plus (+) values transpose up.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the transpose procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Transpose````````Meas``````Ofst
Are`you`sure`?````````````001ø`001```+0`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
transpose operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been transposed, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
196
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
14: NOTE SHIFT
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 14:Note Shift → [ENTER/YES]
Shifts all occurences of the specified note in the specified track and range of
measures to any other note.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Note`Shift``Meas``````From`To``
`````````````````````001ø`001```C≥ ```C≥
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS5], [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
From (Original note)
Range: C-2 … G8
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
To (New note)
Range: C-2 … G8
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track on which the note
shift operation is to be performed (A = track1, B = track 2, and so on). The
LED of the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all other tracks
containing data glow green.
Use [CS5] and [CS6] to specify the first and last measure numbers in the
range of measures over which you want to shift note data. Use [CS7] to specify
the note that is to be shifted (or press the appropriate key on the keyboard after
moving the cursor to the “From” parameter by pressing the [F7] key), and use
[CS8] or the keyboard to specify the new note to which all occurrences of the
“From” note are to be shifted.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the note shift procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Note`Shift``Meas``````From`To``
Are`you`sure`?```````001ø`001```C≥ ```C≥
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
note shift operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the notes have been shifted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
197
15: VELOCITY MODIFY
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 15:Velocity Modify → [ENTER/YES]
Increases or decreases the velocity values of all notes in the specified track and
range of measures.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Vel.Modify``Meas``````Rate`Ofst
`````````````````````001ø`001``000%``+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS5], [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Rate (Velocity ratio)
Range: 000 … 200
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Ofst (Offset)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track on which the
velocity modify operation is to be performed (A = track1, B = track 2, and so
on). The LED of the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all other
tracks containing data glow green.
Use [CS5] and [CS6] to specify the first and last measure numbers in the
range of measures over which you want to modify the velocity data. Use [CS7]
to set the “ratio” between the lower and higher velocity values (a setting of
“100%” maintains the original relationship between the notes, lower values
produce a narrower dynamic range, and higher values produce a broader dynamic range). Use [CS8] to specify the amount of offset (“-” settings reduce
the velocity while “+” settings increase the velocity).
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the velocity modify procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Vel.Modify``Meas``````Rate`Ofst
Are`you`sure`?```````001ø`001``000%``+0`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
velocity modify operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the velocity data has been modified, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
198
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
16: GATE TIME MODIFY
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 16:Gate Time Modify → [ENTER/YES]
Increases or decreases the gate times (length) of all notes in the specified track
and range of measures.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Gate`Modify`Meas``````Rate`Ofst
`````````````````````001ø`001``000%``+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS5], [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Rate (Gate time ratio)
Range: 000 … 200
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Ofst (Offset)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track on which the gate
time modify operation is to be performed (A = track1, B = track 2, and so on).
The LED of the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all other tracks
containing data glow green.
Use [CS5] and [CS6] to specify the first and last measure numbers in the
range of measures over which you want to modify the gate time data. Use
[CS7] to set the “ratio” between the shorter and longer gate time values (a
setting of “100%” maintains the original relationship between the notes, lower
values produce a narrower gate time range, and higher values produce a broader
gate time range). Use [CS8] to specify the amount of offset (“-” settings
shorten the gate time while “+” settings increase the gate time).
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the gate time modify procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Gate`Modify`Meas``````Rate`Ofst
Are`you`sure`?```````001ø`001``000%``+0`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
gate time modify operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the gate time data has been modified, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display.
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
199
17: CRESCENDO
[SONG] → [A]~[H] → [SONG JOB] → [MENU] → 17:Crescendo → [ENTER/YES]
Produces a crescendo or decrescendo across the specified range of measures in the
selected track by gradually increasing or decreasing the note velocity values.
This job is not available when the rhythm track (track 9) is selected.
SONG`JOB`Crescendo````````Meas``````Rng`
``````````````````````````001ø`001```+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Meas (First & last measure numbers)
Range: 001 … 999
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Rng (Range)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the GROUP [A] through [H] keys to select the track on which the
crescendo operation is to be performed (A = track1, B = track 2, and so on).
The LED of the selected track will glow red while the LEDs of all other tracks
containing data glow green.
Use [CS6] and [CS7] to specify the first and last measure numbers in the
range of measures over which you want to produce a crescendo or decrescendo.
Use [CS8] to specify the final range of the crescendo or decrescendo: “-”
settings produce a decrescendo while “+” settings produce a crescendo.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the crescendo procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
SONG`JOB`Crescendo````````Meas``````Rng`
Are`you`sure`?````````````001ø`001```+0`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
crescendo operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the crescendo or decrescendo has been created, “Completed!” will
appear briefly on the display.
200
SONG EDIT MODE /
SONG JOB
PATTERN EDIT MODE
1: COPY PATTERN
[PATTERN] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 1:Copy Pattern → [ENTER/YES]
Copies all pattern data from one pattern to any other. This can be handy if you
want to make minor changes to an existing pattern while retaining a copy of the
original pattern data. It is also possible to append one pattern to another, and copy
the result to a new pattern number.
PTN`JOB`Copy`Pattern``````From``````To``
```````````````<Funk1``V>`I00+`***``I00`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From (Source and append patterns)
Range: 00 … 99
Controls: [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
To
Range: 00 … 99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS6] to select the “From” or source pattern number (0 … 99), [CS7]
to select a pattern to be appended to the end of the of the first pattern (leave
this parameter set to “***” if you do not want to append a pattern), and [CS8]
to select the “To” or destination pattern number. The name of the currently
selected “From” or “To” pattern is shown between parentheses on the lower
display line, depending on which parameter the cursor is positioned below.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the copy procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
PTN`JOB`Copy`Pattern``````From``````To``
Are`you`sure`?`<Funk1``V>`I00+`***``I00`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
copy operation (which will overwrite all data in the “To” pattern number), or
press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the pattern data has been copied, “Completed!” will appear briefly on
the display.
202
PATTERN EDIT MODE /
PATTERN JOB
2: CLEAR PATTERN
[PATTERN] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 2:Clear Pattern → [ENTER/YES]
Entirely clears all patterns, a single pattern, or one instrument (key) from a selected pattern.
PTN`JOB`Clear`Pattern`````Ptn```````````
[PTN]`ALL``KEY`<Funk1``V>`I00w``````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
PTN, ALL, KEY
Range: PTN, ALL, KEY
Controls: [F1], [F2], [F3]
Ptn (Pattern number)
Range: 00 … 99
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Key
Range: 36 … 96 (C1 … C6)
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Press [F1] if you want to clear one pattern, [F2] if you want to clear all
patterns in memory, or [F3] if you want to clear a specified instrument (key)
from a selected pattern. If you select “PTN”, the current pattern name is shown
between parentheses on the lower display line and [CS6] can be used to select
the pattern to be cleared.
If you select “KEY”, the current pattern name is shown between parentheses on the lower display line, [CS6] can be used to select the pattern from
which an instrument is to be cleared, and [CS7] is used to select the key to be
cleared. The key to be cleared can also be directly specified by pressing the
appropriate key on the keyboard. The MIDI note number corresponding to the
selected instrument/key is shown on the lower display line while the note name
(C1 … C6) is shown on the upper line.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the clear procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
PTN`JOB`Clear`Pattern`````Are`you`sure`?
[PTN]`ALL``KEY`<Funk1``V>`I00w``````````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
clear operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the specified data has been cleared, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
PATTERN EDIT MODE /
PATTERN JOB
203
3: INSTRUMENT CHANGE
[PATTERN] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 3:Inst Change → [ENTER/YES]
Allows a specified instrument (key) in one or all patterns to be changed to any
other. This makes it possible to change all occurences of one instrument to a different
instrument in one easy step.
PTN`JOB`Inst`Change```````Ptn``From``To`
[PTN]`ALL``````<Funk1``V>`I00```C1```C1`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
PTN, ALL
Range: PTN, ALL
Controls: [F1], [F2]
Ptn (Pattern number)
Range: 00 … 99
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
From
Range: C1 … C6
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
To
Range: C1 … C6
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Press [F1] if you want to change an instrument in one pattern, or [F2] if
you want to change an instrument in all patterns. If you select “PTN”, the
current pattern name is shown between parentheses on the lower display line
and [CS6] can be used to select the pattern in which an instrument is to be
changed. Use [CS7] (“From”) to select the key corresponding to the instrument
to be changed, and [CS8] (“To”) to select the key corresponding to the new
instrument. The “From” and “To” keys can also be directly specified via the
keyboard when the cursor is located at the corresponding parameter.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the instrument change procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
PTN`JOB`Inst`Change```````Are`you`sure`?
[PTN]`ALL``````<Funk1``V>`I00```C1```C1`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
instrument change operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the instrument has been changed, “Completed!” will appear briefly on
the display, then the display will return to the pattern play mode.
204
PATTERN EDIT MODE /
PATTERN JOB
4: VELOCITY MODIFY
[PATTERN] → [JOB] → [MENU] → 4:Velocity Modify → [ENTER/YES]
Inceases or decreases the velocity values of all occurences of the specified instrument (key) in the specified pattern or all patterns.
PTN`JOB`Velocity`````Ptn``Key``Rate`Ofst
[PTN]`ALL`<Funk1``V>`I00```C1``000%``+0`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
PTN, ALL
Range: PTN, ALL
Controls: [F1], [F2]
Ptn (Pattern number)
Range: 00 … 99
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Key
Range: C1 … C6
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
Rate (Velocity ratio)
Range: 000 … 200
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
PATTERN EDIT MODE /
PATTERN JOB
205
Ofst (Offset)
Range: -99 … +99
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Press [F1] if you want to modify the velocity values of an instrument in
one pattern, or [F2] if you want to modify the velocity values of an instrument
in all patterns. If you select “PTN”, the current pattern name is shown between
parentheses on the lower display line and [CS5] can be used to select the
pattern in which the velocity values are to be modified. Use [CS6] to select the
instrument (key) for which the velocity values are to be modified. Use [CS7] to
set the “ratio” between the lower and higher velocity values (a setting of
“100%” maintains the original relationship between the notes, lower values
produce a narrower dynamic range, and higher values produce a broader dynamic range). Use [CS8] to specify the amount of offset (“-” settings reduce
the velocity while “+” settings increase the velocity).
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the velocity modify procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
PTN`JOB`Velocity`````ptn``Are`you`sure`?
[PTN]`ALL`<Funk1``V>`I00```C1``000%``+0`
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
velocity modify operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the velocity data has been modified, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display, then the display will return to the pattern play mode.
206
PATTERN EDIT MODE /
PATTERN JOB
PATTERN NAME
[PATTERN] → [NAME]
This function can be used to assign a name of up to 8 characters to the current
pattern.
Pattern`Name`````````````I00`:"Funk1``V"
[CLR][UPR][LWR][SPC]````````````[†]``[¥]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Name
Range: See character list, below
Controls: GROUP, PROGRAM, [CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Assigns a name of up to 8 characters to the current pattern.
Use the [F7] function key to move the character cursor to the left, and the
[F8] function key to move the cursor to the right. Use the GROUP and PROGRAM keys to input a character at the cursor position. Each GROUP or PROGRAM key selects the three characters printed above it in sequence. It is also
possible to use the [-1] and [+1] keys or dial to scroll through the available
characters (see list below).
The sliders, [CS1] through [CS8], independently select characters for the
corresponding character position: [CS1] selects the first character, [CS2] selects
the second character, and so on.
The first four function keys also perform important functions: [F1] clears
the entire name, [F2] selects upper-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM
key entry, [F3] selects lower-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM key
entry, and [F4] inserts a space at the cursor position.
GROUP key
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
A → B → C
D → E → F
G → H → I
J → K → L
M → N → O
P → Q → R
S → T → U
V → W → X
PROGRAM key
[1]:
[2]:
[3]:
[4]:
[5]:
[6]:
[7]:
[8]:
Y → Z → 0
1 → 2 → 3
4 → 5 → 6
7 → 8 → 9
* → & → _
/ → . → ,
’ → ! → ?
# → : → ;
PATTERN EDIT MODE /
PATTERN NAME
207
UTILITY MODE
1: SYSTEM
[UTILITY] → [SYNTH SETUP] → [MENU] → 1:System → [ENTER/YES]
This screen includes several parameters that affect overall operation of the SY85.
SYNTH`SYSTEM```NtShft`Tune`CtrlRst`Local
`````````````````+0````+0``````off```on
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
NtShft (Note shift)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial,
Shifts the overall pitch of the SY85 up or down in semitone steps.
A setting of “-12,” for example, shifts the pitch down by one octave; a
setting of “+4” shifts the pitch up by a major third.
Tune (Master tuning)
Range: -63 … +63
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial,
Fine tunes the overall pitch of the SY85 in approximately 1.17-cent steps (a
“cent” is 1/100th of a semitone).
The maximum minus setting of “-63” produces a downward pitch shift of
almost three-quarters of a semitone, and the maximum plus setting of “+63”
produces an upward pitch shift of the same amount. A setting of “0” produces
no pitch change.
CtrlRst (Control reset)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether controller settings (modulation wheel, pitch bend,
breath controller, foot controller, etc.) are held (“off”) or reset (“on”) when
voices or multi-play setups are switched.
If this function is set to “off,” then if, for example, you have applied modulation to a voice via the modulation wheel and switch to a new voice while
maintaining the same modulation wheel position, then the same amount of
modulation will be applied to the new voice. If “on” is selected, than all controller values are reset when a new voice or multi-play setup is selected.
210
UTILITY MODE /
SYNTH SETUP
Local
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial,
“Local control” refers to the fact that, normally, the SY85 keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control ON” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can
be turned OFF, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices,
but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT
connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN
connector.
UTILITY MODE /
SYNTH SETUP
211
2: MIDI 1 (CHANNEL PARAMETERS)
[UTILITY] → [SYNTH SETUP] → [MENU] → 2:MIDI 1 → [ENTER/YES]
The MIDI channel parameters provided here are essential to ensure proper communication between the SY85 and other MIDI instruments.
SYNTH`MIDI`1`````````Tch``Rch`DevNo`````
``````````````````````01`omni``all
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Tch (Transmit channel)
Range: 1 … 16
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the MIDI channel via which all SY85 data will be transmitted.
Rch (Receive channel)
Range: 1 … 16, omni
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the MIDI receive channel to any channel between 1 and 16, or the
“omni” mode for reception on all channels. Make sure that the SY85 MIDI
receive channel is either set to the channel that your external controller is
transmitting on, or the omni mode.
DevNo (Device number)
Range: off, 1 … 16, all
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the SY85 MIDI device number — i.e. the MIDI channel on which all
system exclusive data will be received and transmitted.
The device number is important for transfer of voice data and other system
exclusive data between the SY85 and other Yamaha MIDI devices — e.g.
another SY85 or SY-series synthesizer, a Yamaha MIDI sequence recorder such
as the QX3, etc. Bulk voice data, for example, is transmitted and received on
the channel specified by the device number. Make sure that the SY85 device
number is matched to that of other devices in your system with which such
data transfers will take place.
212
UTILITY MODE /
SYNTH SETUP
3: MIDI 2 (OTHER PARAMETERS)
[UTILITY] → [SYNTH SETUP] → [MENU] → 3:MIDI 2 → [ENTER/YES]
More MIDI parameters that determine how the SY85 responds to external MIDI
control.
SYNTH`MIDI`2`VolCtrl`PC``Bulkprot```````
``````(Main`Vol)007`drct```on
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
VolCtrl (Volume control device)
Range: 000 … 121
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets a MIDI control number via which the overall volume of the SY85 can
be controlled.
PC (Program change type)
Range: off, norm, drct, tbl
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the SY85 will respond to MIDI program change messages for remote voice/performance selection.
The “off” setting turns MIDI program change reception off, so operating the
voice selectors on an external controller will not cause the corresponding SY85
voice or performance setup to be selected.
In the “norm” (normal) mode, program change numbers 0 through 63 select
SY85 voices or performance combinations 1 through 64, depending on the
current mode.
The “drct” (direct) mode allows, in addition to the voice and performance
selection of the “norm” mode, selection of the various SY85 modes by reception of the MIDI program bank change messages listed below.
UTILITY MODE /
SYNTH SETUP
213
MIDI PROGRAM BANK
CHANGE MESSAGE
MODE
MEMORY
Voice
Internal1
Internal2
Internal3
Internal4
Card1
Card2
Card3
Card4
Performance
Internal1
Internal2
Card1
Card2
20
23
26
29
21
24
27
2A
Voice
(multi)
Internal1
Internal2
Internal3
Internal4
Card1
Card2
Card3
Card4
50
53
51
54
Performance
(multi)
Internal1
Internal2
Card1
Card2
“00H”
“20H”
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
03
06
09
01
04
07
0A
00
00
00
00
40
43
41
44
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
When “tbl” (table) is selected, transmission conforms to the program change
table (see “4: PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE,” below), while reception is the
same as in the “drct” mode, above.
Bulkprot (Bulk receive protect)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Enables or disables bulk data reception. When this function is set to “off,”
the SY85 will automatically receive a bulk dump of voice, multi-play or system
data from an external device connected to its MIDI IN terminal when the
appropriate bulk dump data is received (assuming that the SY85 and transmitting device are both set to the same device number).
Turn bulk in protect “on” to disable bulk dump reception (this prevents
accidental disruption of the SY85 during use).
214
UTILITY MODE /
SYNTH SETUP
4: PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE
[UTILITY] → [SYNTH SETUP] → [MENU] → 4:Program Change Table → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters make it possible to specify what MIDI program change number
is transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when any of the internal voice or performance memory locations are selected.
SYNTH`PC`TABLE````BankSel(MSB)(LSB)`PGM`
(Transmit`Only)Source=A1``000``064``000`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Source
Range: A1 … H8
Controls: [CS5], GROUP, PROGRAM, [-1] [+1], Dial
Specifies the source voice number (GROUP and PROGRAM) which, when
selected on the SY85, will cause the bank and program change numbers specified by the “MSB”, “LSB”, and “PGM” parameters, described below, to be
transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector.
MSB (Bank select most significant bits)
Range: 000 … 127
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the decimal value of the most significant bits of the bank select code
to be transmitted when the source voice number is selected. The specific functions of the bank select codes are determined by individual instrument manufacturers, so, if you intend to use these codes, refer to the documentation of the
device you intend to control.
LSB (Bank select least significant bits)
Range: 000 … 127
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the decimal value of the least significant bits of the bank select code
to be transmitted when the source voice number is selected. See “MSB”, above,
for more details.
PGM (Program change number)
Range: 00 … 127
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the MIDI program change number to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT
connector when the corresponding “Source” voice number is selected.
UTILITY MODE /
SYNTH SETUP
215
5: VELOCITY
[UTILITY] → [SYNTH SETUP] → [MENU] → 5:Velocity → [ENTER/YES]
Thge SY85 offers a range of keyboard velocity curves that produce subtly different responses to keyboard dynamics. Choose the velocity curve that best suits your
personal style of expression.
SYNTH`OTHER`Vel)Crv``Fix````````````````
``````````(normal)0``off````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Crv (Velocity curve)
Range: 0 … 7
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects one of eight different velocity curves.
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
normal
soft1
soft2
easy
wide
hard
cross1
cross2
The velocity curves determine how the SY85 responds to different velocity
values (i.e. keyboard dynamics). Different keyboards and controllers have
different velocity sensitivity, and different players have individual preferences.
This function lets you select the velocity curve that best suits your keyboard/
controller and playing style. Try each one out to find the one you like best.
Fix
Range: off, 1 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets an absolute velocity value. All notes played, no matter how hard they
are played, are sounded at the specified velocity value. When this parameter is
set to “off” normal keyboard velocity control is enabled.
216
UTILITY MODE /
SYNTH SETUP
1: CLICK CONDITION
[UTILITY] → [SEQ SETUP] → [MENU] → 1:Click Condition → [ENTER/YES]
The parametrers provided in this screen determine how the sequencer’s metronome
functions, and whether sequencer operation is synchronized to the SY85’s own internal clock or an external MIDI device.
SEQUENCER`Click`Beat`Clock`````MIDI`Ctrl
````````````on```1/4``int````````````on`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Click
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Enables or disables the sequencer’s metronome click sound.
The “off” setting means that the metronome never sounds. This setting is
useful for recording free-tempo passages. The “on” setting causes the metronome to sound during real-time recording.
The volume of the click metronome sound can be adjusted via the rearpanel [CLICK VOLUME] control.
Beat
Range: 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Effective only in the pattern mode, this parameter determines how many
metronome beats occur between each accented beat.
Clock
Range: int, MIDI
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Determines whether the SY85 sequencer timing is synchronized by its own
internal clock or an external MIDI clock.
“int” (internal) is the normal setting when the SY85 is being used alone. If
you are using the SY85 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other
MIDI device, and you want the SY85 to be synchronized to the external device,
set this function to MIDI. In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the SY85 MIDI IN connector, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.
UTILITY MODE /
SEQUENCER SETUP
217
MIDI Ctrl
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Enables or disables reception and transmission of MIDI start, stop, and
continue messages; enables or disables MIDI clock transmission; and enables or
disables MIDI song position pointer reception.
218
UTILITY MODE /
SEQUENCER SETUP
2: RECORD CONDITION
[UTILITY] → [SEQ SETUP] → [MENU] → 2:Rec Condition → [ENTER/YES]
Since you might want to use the SY85 sequencer to record material from an
external MIDI device rather than the instrument’s own keyboard, the Receive Channel
parameter on this page is provided so you can specify reception on any MIDI channel. The Aftertouch parameter is used to turn recording of aftertouch data on or off.
SEQUENCER`Rec`Condition````````Rch```AT`
```````````````````````````````kbd``off`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Rch (Receive channel)
Range: 1 … 16, omni, kbd
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects input from the SY85 keyboard, or sets the MIDI receive channel
when data is to be recorded from an external MIDI device.
This function must be set to “kbd” if you will be recording from the SY85
keyboard. If you will be recording from an external MIDI controller such as a
master keyboard or wind controller, however, select the appropriate MIDI
channel or the “omni” mode for reception on all MIDI channels.
AT (Aftertouch)
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Turns recording of after touch data on or off.
After touch data tends to be quite voluminous, and can use up the
sequencer memory capacity quickly, For this reason, the default setting for after
touch data recording is “off.” turn this parameter “on” only if you specifically
want to use an after touch effect.
UTILITY MODE /
SEQUENCER SETUP
219
3: ACCENT VELOCITY
[UTILITY] → [SEQ SETUP] → [MENU] → 3:Accent Velocity → [ENTER/YES]
Determine the velocity values of three accent types that can be entered in the
song/pattern step record mode and in the pattern real-time record mode, and of the
fixed velocity value for all record modes.
SEQUENCER`Accent`````ACC1`ACC2`ACC3`FIX`
``````````````````````56```88``120``kbd`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
ACC1, ACC2, ACC3 (Accents 1 … 3)
Range: 1 … 127
Controls: [CS5], [CS6], [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
[CS5], [CS6], and [CS7] set the ACC1, ACC2, and ACC3 velocity values,
respectively. Refer to the step recording instructions beginning on page 52 of
the “Getting Started” manual for more information about the accents.
FIX
Range: 1 … 127, kbd
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Set to “kbd” for normal velocity control during recording, or to a specific
fixed velocity value, as required. The specified value will be used for all song
and pattern recording.
220
UTILITY MODE /
SEQUENCER SETUP
4: SONG CHAIN
[UTILITY] → [SEQ SETUP] → [MENU] → 4:Song Chain → [ENTER/YES]
These parameters allow repeat playback of a single song, sequential playback of
several songs, or repeat playback of a sequence of songs.
SEQUENCER`Song```````Loop:÷ ```Chain:º```
`````````````````````off```````off``````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Loop
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
When this parameter is turned “on”, a song (or chain of songs — see
below) played back in the song play mode will repeat continuously until
stopped manually. When “on” the loop symbol ( ÷ ) will apear on the display
in the song play mode.
Chain
Range: off, on
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
When this parameter is turned “on”, consecutively-numbered songs that
contain data will be played back in sequence in the song play mode, then
playback will stop when the last song has finished. If the “Loop” parameter is
also “on”, the entire chain will repeat until stopped manually. When “on” the
chain symbol ( º ) will apear on the display in the song play mode.
UTILITY MODE /
SEQUENCER SETUP
221
BULK DUMP
[UTILITY] → [MIDI]
Initiates MIDI bulk transmission of the selected voice, multi-play, and/or system
data.
Bulk`Dump````Type```````````````````````
`````````````1`:all
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Type
Range: all, synth all, sequencer all, pattern all, 1 performance, 1
voice, 1 song
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS3] to select the type of data you want to transmit. The various data
types are as follows:
1: all
2: synth all
All internal data.
All synthesizer data, including setup, performance
combinations, and voices.
3: sequencer all All sequencer data, including setup, songs,and patterns.
4: pattern all
All patterns.
5: 1 performance The currently selected performance combination.
6: 1 voice
The currently selected voice.
7: 1 song
The currently selected song, including multi data.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the bulk dump procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
Bulk`Dump````Type`````````Are`you`sure`?
`````````````1`:all
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
bulk dump operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been transmitted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on
the display.
This function is useful for transferring synthesizer, sequencer, and/or system
data from one SY85 to another. If the MIDI OUT of the transmitting SY85 is
connected to the MIDI IN of the receiving SY85 via a MIDI cable, the receiving unit will automatically receive and load the data as long as its BULK
RECEIVE PROTECT (page 214) function is turned “off” and it is set to the
same device number as the transmitting SY85. Another possibility is to transfer
the data to an external MIDI bulk data storage device for long-term storage.
222
UTILITY MODE /
MIDI
1: CARD ALL LOAD/SAVE
[UTILITY] → [CARD] → [MENU] → 1:ALL Load/Save → [ENTER/YES]
Saves or loads all internal voices and performance combinations to or from a
Yamaha MCD64 memory card plugged into to the DATA card slot.
CARD`All```````````````````Card=<------>
[LOAD]SAVE```````Card`````¥`Internal````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Before executing a load or save operation, check the card status as shown
in the upper right corner of the display. If the display shows “Card=<SY85 >”,
a properly formatted MCD64 is installed and the load or save operation can be
executed. If the wrong type of card (wrong format) or no card is installed in
the DATA slot, however, the card status display will show “Card=<------>” and
no load or save operation is possible. You will have to use the card format job,
described next, to format a new memory card or one that has been formatted
for use with a different instrument before the card can be used with the SY85.
Also make sure that the card write protect switch (see MCD64 Memory Card
operation manual) is set to the “OFF” position before attempting to save data to
the card.
Press the [F1] key to highlight “LOAD” on the display if you want to load
the voices and performance combinations from the card into the SY85’s internal
memory, or press the [F2] key to highlight “SAVE” on the display if you want
to save the voice and performance data from the internal memory to the card.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the card load or save procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
CARD`All```````````````````Card=<------>
[LOAD]SAVE```````Card`````Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
card load or save operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been loaded or saved, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
UTILITY MODE /
CARD
223
2: CARD FORMAT
[UTILITY] → [CARD] → [MENU] → 2:Format → [ENTER/YES]
New memory cards, or cards that have been formatted for use with a different
instrument or device, will have to be formatted specifically for use with the SY85.
Note that this operation will erase any existing data on the card.
CARD`Format````````````````Card=<------>
````````````````````````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
After plugging the card to be formatted into the DATA card slot, press
[ENTER/YES] to begin the card format procedure. The following confirmation
display will appear:
CARD`Format````````````````Card=<------>
``````````````````````````Are`you`sure`?
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
card format operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the card has been formatted, “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
224
UTILITY MODE /
CARD
1: DISK ALL LOAD/SAVE
2: DISK ALL LOAD/SAVE SYNTH
3: DISK ALL LOAD/SAVE SEQ
4: DISK NSEQ LOAD/SAVE
5: DISK OTHER LOAD/SAVE
[UTILITY] → [DISK] → [MENU] →
→
→
→
→
1:All Load/Save → [ENTER/YES]
2:Synth All Load/Save → [ENTER/YES]
3:Seq All Load/Save → [ENTER/YES]
4:NSEQ Load/Save → [ENTER/YES]
5:Other Load/Save → [ENTER/YES]
These 5 disk utilities allow different types of data to be saved to or loaded from
a 3.5" floppy disk inserted in the SY85 disk drive. Since the operation of all five
utilities is almost identical, they will be described here in a single section.
Use only 2DD type disks that have been formatted for use with the SY85 via the
DISK FORMAT function described on page 235.
● 1: Load or Save All Synthesizer & Sequencer Data
DISK`All```````<--NEW--*>```````````````
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● 2: Load or Save All Synthesizer Data
DISK`Synth`All`<--NEW--*>```````````````
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
225
● 3: Load or Save All Sequencer Data
DISK`Seq`All```<--NEW--*>```````````````
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● 4: Load or Save 1 NSEQ File
DISK`NSEQ``````<--NEW--*>```<InitSong>``
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal:01`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
● 5: Load or Save 1 Song in Standard MIDI File Format
DISK`Other`````<--NEW--*>```<InitSong>``
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal:01`
226
UTILITY MODE /
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
DISK
Press the [F1] key to highlight “LOAD” on the display if you want to load
data from the disk into the SY85 internal memory, or press the [F2] key to
highlight “SAVE” on the display if you want to save data from the internal
memory to the disk. Next, use [CS5] to select the number of the disk file (01
through 99) that you want to load from or save to. In the case of utilities
number 4 and 5, you also need to select the number of the song (1 through 10)
to be loaded or saved via [CS8].
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the disk load or save procedure. If you select
“SAVE”, you have the option of pressing the [F3] key to give the data file a
name before it is saved (the name is displayed above the file number — unnamed files are automatically named “--NEW--*”). If you choose the “NAME”
option, enter the file name in the normal way (see page 95)◊, then press [ENTER/YES] to begin the disk load or save procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
DISK`All```````<--NEW--*>`Are`you`sure`?
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
disk load or save operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been loaded or saved, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
See page 321 for information on disk error messages.
◊
Please note the following points if you will writing or modifying disk
file names using a personal computer.
• The file extension “.Xnn” must be present (“nn” is the extension
number).
• If two files having the same extension number exist on the same
disk, only one will appear on the display. Please make sure that all
files on the same disk have different extension numbers.
• Unlike voice names, file name can consist only of upper-case characters.
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
227
6: MDR
[UTILITY] → [DISK] → [MENU] → 6:MDR → [ENTER/YES]
The MDR (MIDI Data Recorder) utilities allow MIDI bulk dump data to be
transferred between different MIDI devices via the SY85, and saved to or loaded
from floppy disk.
Engaging the MDR utilities required an extra confirmation step since all
sequencer data in the SY85 song memory is erased when the MDR functions are
used. This is because the sequencer memory is used as temporary storage for MDR
data handled by the SY85.
MDR`````````````````````````````````````
`````````````````````````````Hit`[ENTER]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From this entry display press [ENTER/YES]. The following confirmation
display will appear:
MDR```````````````````````Are`you`sure`?
****`Sequencer`data`will`be`erased`!`***
Press [ENTER/YES] again to access the MDR functions (erasing any song
data in the process), or [EXIT/NO] to quit. Once in the MDR mode, you can
use th PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys to access the two display screens it includes.
Press [EXIT/NO] when you’re ready to exit from the MDR mode.
k
228
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
l
● 1: MDR IN/OUT
This utility allows MIDI bulk data to be received from an external device and
stored in the SY85 internal memory, after which it can be saved to disk by using the
MDR SAVE utility, described next. In the same way, MIDI bulk data that has been
loaded into the SY85 memory from disk using the MDR LOAD utility can be transmitted to an external device.
MDR`````````````````````Block`Count=000`
`[IN]`OUT``INIT```Interval=01`DataNo=01`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Up to 16 different MDR files can be retained in internal memory. Use
[CS8] (“DataNo”) to select the number of the file to be initialized, transmitted,
or received.
The “Interval” parameter, adjustable from 01 to 10 via [CS6], sets a delay
interval between transmitted data to conform to the timing requirements of
some MIDI devices. Normally the “Interval” parameter can be set at “01”
unless your receiving device has trouble receiving data from the SY85.
Initializing the MDR Memory
Press [F3] (“INIT”) and then press [ENTER/YES] twice to initialize (clear)
the selected file number. “Completed!” appears briefly when the data has been
initialized.
Receiving MDR Data
Press [F1] (“IN”) and then [ENTER/YES] to receive the data to the current
file number. The number of data blocks received is displayed on the upper
display line during reception.
Transmitting MDR Data
Press [F2] (“OUT”) and then [ENTER/YES] to transmit the data in the
current file number. The number of data blocks transmitted is displayed on the
upper display line during transmission. “Completed!” appears briefly when the
data has been transmitted.
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
229
● 2: MDR SAVE/LOAD
This utility is used to move MDR data between the internal memory and disk. A
SAVE operation saves MDR data from the internal memory to the specified disk file
number, and a LOAD operation loads MDR data to the internal memory from the
specified disk file number.
MDR````````````<--NEW--*>```````````````
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press the [F1] key to highlight “LOAD” on the display if you want to load
MDR data from the disk into the SY85 internal memory, or press the [F2] key
to highlight “SAVE” on the display if you want to save MDR data from the
internal memory to the disk. Next, use [CS5] to select the number of the disk
file (00 through 99) that you want to load from or save to.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the MDR disk load or save procedure. If you
select “SAVE”, you have the option of pressing the [F2] key to give the data
file a name before it is saved (the name is displayed above the file number —
unnamed files are automatically named “--NEW--*”). If you choose the
“NAME” option, enter the file name in the normal way (see page 95), then
press [ENTER/YES] to begin the disk load or save procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
MDR````````````<--NEW--*>`Are`you`sure`?
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01``¥`Internal````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
disk load or save operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been loaded or saved, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
See page 321 for information on disk error messages.
230
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
7: RENAME/DELETE
[UTILITY] → [DISK] → [MENU] → 7:Rename, Delete → [ENTER/YES]
These utilities allow disk files to be renamed or deleted.
DISK`Rename/Del<````````>```Type````````
[REN]`DEL````````Disk=01````1:All,Sy,Seq
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press the [F1] key to highlight “REN” on the display if you want to rename
a file, or press the [F2] key to highlight “DEL” on the display if you want to
delete a file. Next, use [CS6] to select the type of data file you want to rename
or delete (“1:All,Sy,Seq” for all synthesizer and sequencer files, “NSEQ” for
NSEQ format files, “Other” for standard MIDI format files, and “MDR” for
MDR files). Use [CS5] to select the number of the disk file (01 through 99)
that you want to load from or save to. Only files that have the selected file
type will show a file name above the file number.
If you selected “REN”, enter the file name with the group and program
keys as in “Voice Name” (see page 95), then press [ENTER/YES] to begin the
rename procedure. If you selected “DEL”, simply press [ENTER/YES] to begin
the delete procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
DISK`Rename/Del<````````>`Are`you`sure`?
`REN`[DEL]```````Disk=01````1:All,Sy,Seq
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
file rename or delete operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the file has been renamed or deleted, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display.
See page 321 for information on disk error messages.
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
231
8: BACKUP DISK
[UTILITY] → [DISK] → [MENU] → 8:Backup Disk → [ENTER/YES] → [ENTER/YES]
The disk backup utility makes it simple to create backup disks of important data.
Engaging the disk backup utility required an extra confirmation step since all
sequencer data in the SY85 song memory is erased when the disk backup function is
used. This is because the sequencer memory is used as temporary storage for the data
copied from the source disk to the backup disk.
DISK`Backup```````````````Are`you`sure`?
****`Sequencer`data`will`be`erased`!`***
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to access the disk backup utility (erasing any song
data in the process), or [EXIT/NO] to quit.
DISK`Backup`````````````````````````````
Input`source`disk`!```````````Hit[ENTER]
When this display appears, insert the source disk containing the data to be
backed up, then press [ENTER/YES].
DISK`Backup`***`Now`loading`source`*****
```````**`BUSY`**`Now`executing`!
“Now loading source” appears on the display while the data from the source
disk is loaded into the SY85 memory.
DISK`Backup`````````````````````````````
Input`destination`disk`!``````Hit[ENTER]
When this display appears, insert the blank, formatted disk to which the
data is to be copied (i.e. the backup disk), then press [ENTER/YES].
232
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
DISK`Backup`***`Now`saving`destination`*
```````**`BUSY`**`Now`executing`!
This display appears while the data is being saved to the destination disk,
then “Completed!” will appear briefly when the data has been saved.
See page 321 for information on disk error messages.
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
233
9: DISK STATUS
[UTILITY] → [DISK] → [MENU] → 9:Disk Status → [ENTER/YES]
This display shows the amount of remaining disk space in kilobytes. A newly
formatted disk has a free area of approximately 713 kilobytes.
DISK`Status`````````````````````````````
```````````````Free`area=``0`Kbyte``````
234
UTILITY MODE /
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
DISK
10: DISK FORMAT
[UTILITY] → [DISK] → [MENU] → 10:Format → [ENTER/YES]
The disk format utility must be used to format new floppy disks, or disks that
have been formatted for use with other equipment, before they can be used with the
SY85.
DISK`Format`````````````````````````````
````````````````````````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the format operation. Note that formatting a
disk that already contains data will erase all data on the disk!
DISK`Format```````````````Are`you`sure`?
````````````````````````````````````````
“Now formatting” appears on the display while the disk is being formatted,
and the percent of the disk that has been formatted is shown on the lower
display line.
When the disk has been completely formatted, “Completed!” will appear
briefly on the display.
See page 321 for information on disk error messages.
UTILITY MODE /
DISK
235
WAVE EDIT MODE
Unlike the other SY85 modes, the WAVE mode is not directly accessed via the
mode matrix. To access the WAVE mode, press the [UTILITY] key while holding the
[SHIFT] key. This takes you directly to the WAVEFORM NUMBER SELECT screen,
described on the following page.
[SHIFT] + [UTILITY] → WAVE MODE
Waveform`Number`Select````````<InitWave>
````````````````````````````Waveform=00`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
The other matrix UTILITY SUB MODE keys access the following functions:
[UTILITY]
[WAVE]
[SYNTH SETUP] ........ [EDIT]
[SEQ SETUP] ............. [INITIALIZE]
[MIDI] ........................... [MIDI SAMPLE DUMP]
[CARD] ......................... [CARD]
[DISK] .......................... [DISK]
238
WAVE EDIT MODE
WAVE NUMBER SELECT
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY]
Specifies the number of the waveform to be edited using the WAVE EDIT functions, and the number of the waveform to which a sample loaded from disk will be
assigned.
Waveform`Number`Select````````<InitWave>
````````````````````````````Waveform=00`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Waveform
Range: 00 … 63
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS8] to select the number of the waveform to be edited. The name of
the selected waveform appears between parentheses on the upper display line.
WAVE EDIT MODE /
WAVE
239
1: WAVE ASSIGN
2: WAVE NAME
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [SYNTH SETUP] → [MENU] → 1:Waveform → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [ENTER/YES] → [MENU] → 1:Assign → [ENTER/YES]
→ 2:Name → [ENTER/YES]
k
l
After pressing the [SYNTH SETUP] SUB MODE key (actually the [EDIT] key in
the WAVE mode), the PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys can be used to select the entry
display for the WAVEFORM EDIT or SAMPLE EDIT functions. Select “WAVEFORM EDIT”.
WAVEFORM`EDIT```````````````````````````
`````````````````````````````Hit`[ENTER]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From this entry display press [ENTER/YES].
Press [EXIT/NO] when you’re ready to exit from the WAVEFORM EDIT
mode.
● 1: WAVE ASSIGN
k
If not already selected, press the PAGE [ ] key to select this screen.
This function assigns the selected sample(s) to a “waveform”. A waveform
can consist of anywhere from 0 to 63 samples. The SAMPLE EDIT functions
described below allows each sample assigned to a waveform to be mapped to a
specific range of the keyboard, as well as allowing the volume, pitch, and loop
characteristics of each sample to be set individually.
WAVEFORM`Assign``From`To``````<InitWave>
[`ON][OFF]```````--```--````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
ON, OFF
Range: ON, OFF
Controls: [F1], [F2]
240
WAVE EDIT MODE /
EDIT
From/To
Range: 00 … 63
Controls: [CS4]/[CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Press [F1] to turn wave assignment on. If wave assignment is turned off, “--” appears in place of the “From” and “To” parameters. Use [CS4] and [CS5]
to specify the range of samples to be assigned to the waveform. [CS4] specifies
the first sample (“From”) and [CS5] specifies the last sample (“To”) in the
range to be assigned. If both the “From” and “To” parameters are set to the
same sample number, then only that sample is assigned to the waveform. If, for
example, “From” is set to “2” and “To” is set to “5”, then sample numbers 2,
3, 4, and 5 are assigned to the waveform.
● 2: WAVE NAME
l
If not already selected, press the PAGE [ ] key to select this screen.
This function can be used to assign a name of up to 8 characters to the
current sample.
WAVEFORM`Name`````````````````"InitWave"
[CLR][UPR][LWR][SPC]````````````[†]``[¥]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Name
Range: See character list, below
Controls: GROUP, PROGRAM, [F1] … [F4], [F7], [F8],
[CS1] … [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use the [F7] function key to move the character cursor to the left, and the
[F8] function key to move the cursor to the right. Use the GROUP and PROGRAM keys to input a character at the cursor position. Each GROUP or PROGRAM key selects the three characters printed above it in sequence. It is also
possible to use the [-1] and [+1] keys or dial to scroll through the available
characters (see list below).
The sliders, [CS1] through [CS8], independently select characters for the
corresponding character position: [CS1] selects the first character, [CS2] selects
the second character, and so on.
The first four function keys also perform important functions: [F1] clears
the entire name, [F2] selects upper-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM
key entry, [F3] selects lower-case characters for GROUP and PROGRAM key
entry, and [F4] inserts a space at the cursor position.
WAVE EDIT MODE /
EDIT
241
GROUP key
[A]:
[B]:
[C]:
[D]:
[E]:
[F]:
[G]:
[H]:
242
WAVE EDIT MODE /
EDIT
A → B → C
D → E → F
G → H → I
J → K → L
M → N → O
P → Q → R
S → T → U
V → W → X
PROGRAM key
[1]:
[2]:
[3]:
[4]:
[5]:
[6]:
[7]:
[8]:
Y → Z → 0
1 → 2 → 3
4 → 5 → 6
7 → 8 → 9
* → & → _
/ → . → ,
’ → ! → ?
# → : → ;
1: SAMPLE KEY MAP
2: SAMPLE DATA
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [SYNTH SETUP] → [MENU] → 2:Sample → [ENTER/YES] →
→ [ENTER/YES] → [MENU] → 1:Key Map → [ENTER/YES]
→ 2:Data → [ENTER/YES]
k
l
After pressing the [SYNTH SETUP] SUB MODE key (actually the [EDIT] key in
the WAVE mode), the PAGE [ ] and [ ] keys can be used to select the entry
display for the WAVEFORM EDIT or SAMPLE EDIT functions. Select “SAMPLE
EDIT”.
``SAMPLE`EDIT```````````````````````````
`````````````````````````````Hit`[ENTER]
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
From this entry display press [ENTER/YES].
Press [EXIT/NO] when you’re ready to exit from the SAMPLE EDIT mode.
● 1: SAMPLE KEY MAP
k
If not already selected, press the PAGE [ ] key to select this screen.
This function is used to “map” the samples assigned to the waveform to
specific regions of the keyboard. If more than one sample is assigned, start by
selecting the sample you want to map via the “Sample” parameter, then use the
“Org”, “Low”, and “High” parameters to map the specified sample.
SMPL`Map```Org``Low``High`````---------```````````---``---``---``````Sample=--`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
WAVE EDIT MODE /
SAMPLE EDIT
243
Org (Original note)
Range: C-2 … C8
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
This parameter specifies the “original note” to which the pitch of the raw
waveform will be assigned. In addition to the [CS3] slider, the original note
can be specified by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard if the cursor
is located below the “Org” parameter.
If, for example, the raw sample has a pitch of C3, then setting this parameter to “C3” will cause the right note to sound when the C3 key is played. If,
however, the same sample is mapped to C4, then playing the C4 key will
produce a pitch of C3 while playing the C3 will produce a pitch of C2.
Low/High (Low and high limits)
Range: C-2 … C8
Controls: [CS4]/[CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial, Keyboard
These parameters specify the lowest and highest notes on the keyboard on
which the selected sample will sound. In addition to the [CS4] and [CS5]
sliders, the low and high limits can be specified by pressing the appropriate
keys on the keyboard if the cursor is located below the corresponding parameter.
If “Low” is set to “C1” and “High” is set to “C3”, for example, then the
current sample will sound only when keys between (and including) C1 and C3
are played.
Sample
Range: 00 … 63
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the sample to be mapped using the “Org”, “Low”, and “High”
parameters.
The memory area in which the selected sample resides is shown on the
upper display line (“Volatile” or “Non-vol.”), and an inverted key symbol
appears to the right of sample numbers that correspond to copy-protected samples.
244
WAVE EDIT MODE /
SAMPLE EDIT
● 2: SAMPLE DATA
l
If not already selected, press the PAGE [ ] key to select this screen.
These functions allow the volume, pitch, and loop characteristics of each
sample assigned to the waveform to be set individually. If more than one
sample is assigned, start by selecting the sample you want to edit via the
“Sample” parameter, then use the “Vol”, “Pitch”, “Loop”, and “Typ” parameters to edit the specified sample.
SMPL`Data``Vol`Pitch`Loop`Typ`---------```````````---`-----`----`---`Sample=--`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Vol (Volume)
Range: 0 … 127
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Sets the volume of the selected sample. A setting of “0” produces minimum
volume (almost no sound), and a setting of “127” produces maximum volume.
Use this parameter to balance the levels of the different samples used in a
waveform.
Pitch
Range: -4158 … +5376
Controls: [CS4], [-1] [+1], Dial
Fine-tunes the pitch of the selected range over a wide range. Minus (-)
settings decrease the pitch of the sample while plus (+) settings raise the pitch
of the sample. Each increment corresponds to a pitch change of approximately
1.7 cents (a “cent” is one-hundredth of a semitone).
WAVE EDIT MODE /
SAMPLE EDIT
245
Loop
Range: FOne, FLp, BOne, BLp
Controls: [CS5], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the type of loop to be used for playback of the selected sample. The
settings are:
FOne = Forward one-shot. The sample is played in the normal forward
direction and is not looped (i.e. the sound stops a the end of the
sample).
FLp
= Forward loop. The sample is played in the normal forward direction
and is looped (repeated) as long as the key is held.
BOne = Backward one-shot. The sample is played backward and is not
looped (i.e. the sound stops at the beginning of the sample).
BLp
= Backward loop. The sample is played backward and is looped
(repeated) as long as the key is held.
Typ (Loop type)
Range: Nrm, Alt
Controls: [CS6], [-1] [+1], Dial
This parameter is only available when either the “FLp” or “BLp” loop type
is selected (see “Loop”, above). When set to “Nrm” (normal), the sample is
repeatedly looped in either the forward or reverse direction, as specified by the
Loop parameter. If “Alt” (alternate) is selected, the sample is alternately played
forward and backward.
Sample
Range: 00 … 63
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
Selects the sample to be edited using the “Vol”, “Pitch”, “Loop”, and “Typ”
parameters.
The memory area in which the selected sample resides is shown on the
upper display line (“Volatile” or “Non-vol.”), and an inverted key symbol
appears to the right of sample numbers that correspond to copy-protected samples.
246
WAVE EDIT MODE /
SAMPLE EDIT
WAVE INITIALIZE
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [SEQ SETUP]
This function erases and initializes all wave memory, the specified type of wave
memory, or a single specified sample.
WAVE`Initialize`````Wave`Mem`Allocation`
`Volatile`Mem.````````NonÒvol.``Mem`=off
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Mem (Memory type)
Range: Volatile, Non-vol., all
Controls: [CS2], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS2] to select either the volatile wave memory (“Volatile Mem.”),
non-volatile wave memory (Non-vol. Mem.”), or all wave memory to be
cleared.
See “Wave Memory Expansion” on page 285 for additional information.
Wave Mem Allocation
Range: 0 … 63, off
Controls: [CS8], [-1] [+1], Dial
All numbers from the number specified here to 63 are allocated for use as
non-volatile waveform and sample numbers.
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the wave initialize procedure. The following
confirmation display will appear:
WAVE`Initialize`````Wave``Are`you`sure`?
`Volatile`Mem.````````NonÒvol.``Mem`=off
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
initialize operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the specified wave memory has been initialized, “Completed!” will
appear briefly on the display.
WAVE EDIT MODE /
INITIALIZE
247
1: SAMPLE DUMP RECEIVE
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [MIDI] → [MENU] → 1:Receive → [ENTER/YES]
This function initiates reception of MIDI Sample Dump data from an external
MIDI device. Both the MIDI IN and OUT terminals must be connected to the external MIDI device, since the SY85 transmits a sample dump request message to initiate
transmission by the external device.
MIDI`SAMPLE`DUMP`Receive````````To``````
`````Sample=00`````````````Volatile`Mem.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Sample
Range: 00 … 99
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
To
Range: Volatile, Non-vol.
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS3] to select the number of the sample to be received from the
transmitting device, and [CS7] to select the type of memory in which the data
is to be stored (see “Wave Memory Expansion” on page 285 for additional
information about the memory types).
When ready to receive the data, press the [ENTER/YES] key. This initiates
transmission of a sample dump request message, then the SY85 waits for the
sample dump data. The received data is appended to the sample data previously
residing in the SY85 memory.
The [EXIT/NO] key can be used to cancel reception at any time.
248
WAVE EDIT MODE /
MIDI SAMPLE DUMP
2: SAMPLE DUMP TRANSMIT
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [MIDI] → [MENU] → 2:Transmit → [ENTER/YES]
This function initiates transmission of MIDI Sample Dump data to an external
MIDI device.
MIDI`SAMPLE`DUMP`Transmit```````````````
`````Sample=--``````````````````````````
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Sample
Range: 00 … 63
Controls: [CS3], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS3] to select the number of the sample to be transmitted (“--” appears on the display if no samples are available).
When ready to transmit the data, press the [ENTER/YES] key. The following confirmation display will appear:
MIDI`SAMPLE`DUMP`Transmit`Are`you`sure`?
`````Sample=--``````````````````````````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
transmission, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
“MIDI Transmitting!” appears while the data is being transmitted, as does a
countdown of the sample packets being sent.
The [EXIT/NO] key can be used to cancel reception at any time.
WAVE EDIT MODE /
MIDI SAMPLE DUMP
249
WAVE CARD LOAD
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [CARD]
Loads all samples from a pre-programmed card plugged into the WAVEFORM
card slot.
WAVE`Card`Load``````````````````````````
`````````````````Card````¥`Volatile`Mem.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
To
Range: Volatile, Non-vol.
Controls: [CS7], [-1] [+1], Dial
Use [CS7] to select the type of memory to which the data is to be stored
(see “Wave Memory Expansion” on page 285 for additional information about
the memory types).
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the card load procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
WAVE`Card`Load````````````Are`you`sure`?
`````````````````Card````¥`Volatile`Mem.
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
card load operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been loaded , “Completed!” will appear briefly on the
display.
250
WAVE EDIT MODE /
CARD
WAVE DISK LOAD/SAVE 1 SAMPLE
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [DISK]
These utilities allow sample data to be saved to or loaded from a 3.5" floppy disk
inserted in the SY85 disk drive.
Use only 2DD type disks that have been formatted for use with the SY85 via the
DISK FORMAT function described on page 235.
WAVE`Disk`1Smpl`<--NEW--*>``````````````
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01`¥`Volatile`Mem`
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
Press the [F1] key to highlight “LOAD” on the display if you want to load
data from the disk into the SY85 wave memory, or press the [F2] key to highlight “SAVE” on the display if you want to save data from the wave memory
to the disk. Next, use [CS5] to select the number of the disk file (01 through
99) that you want to load from or save to. If you select “LOAD”, [CS7] is
used to select the type of wave memory to which to data is to be loaded
(“Volatile” or “Non-vol.”). If you select “SAVE”, [CS7] is used to select the
number of the sample to be saved (00 … 63).
Press [ENTER/YES] to begin the disk load or save procedure. If you select
“SAVE”, you have the option of pressing the [F3] key to give the data file a
name before it is saved (the name is displayed above the file number — unnamed files are automatically named “--NEW--*”). If you choose the “NAME”
option, enter the file name with the group and program keys as in “Voice
Name” (see page 95), then press [ENTER/YES] to begin the disk load or save
procedure. The following confirmation display will appear:
WAVE`Disk`1Smpl`<--NEW--*>Are`you`sure`?
[LOAD]SAVE```````Disk=01`¥`Volatile`````
Press [ENTER/YES] again to confirm that you want to go ahead with the
disk load or save operation, or press [EXIT/NO] to cancel.
When the data has been loaded or saved, “Completed!” will appear briefly
on the display.
See page 321 for information on disk error messages
WAVE EDIT MODE /
DISK
251
WAVE MEMORY STATUS DISPLAY
[SHIFT]+[UTILITY] → [SHIFT]
Press and hold the [SHIFT] key at any time while in the WAVE mode to call the
wave memory status display. This display shows the amount of free volatile and nonvolatile memory in approximate kilobytes.
See “Wave Memory Expansion” on page 285 for information about volatile and
non-volatile wave memory.
WAVE`Memory`Status``Volatile:``512kbytes
```````(Free`Area)``Non»vol.:`1024kbytes
252
WAVE EDIT MODE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
APPENDIX
■ Effects ...................................................... 254
■ Wave memory expansion ........................ 285
■ Initial data & Blank chart ........................ 289
■ Specifications .......................................... 319
■ Error messages ....................................... 320
■ Trouble shooting ...................................... 324
■ Index ........................................................ 326
EFFECTS
The SY85 features a sophisticated effect system that affords extraordinary
sound-shaping potential. It includes two separate effect processors — referred
to a EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 in this manual — that can be connected either
in series or in parallel via the effect “Mode” parameter (page 105 for voice
effects, page 128 for drum voice effects, page 37 for performance effects, page
166 for song mode effects). In simplified block diagram form the serial and
parallel modes look like this:
The illustrations here are not available.
The SY85 has 90 different effects including reverb, early reflections, delay,
pitch change, modulation and more. Any of these can be assigned to the
EFFECT 1 and EFFECT 2 processors via the “EF1 Type” and “EF2 Type”
parameters (page 105 for voice effects, page 128 for drum voice effects, page
37 for performance effects, page 166 for song mode effects). Each effect has
up to 8 different parameters that can be edited via the EFFECT 1 PARAMETERS and EFFECT 2 PARAMETERS screens (page 109 for voice effects,
page 135 for drum voice effects, page 44 for performance effects, page 173 for
song mode effects). A complete list of the effects and their parameters is
provided on page 274.
The 90 effects are further divided into three types:
Effects 00 - 30 ........... “Single”
Effects 31 - 60 ........... “Cascade”
Effects 61 - 90 ........... “Dual”
The “Single” effects are, as the name applies, single effects.
The illustrations here are not available.
254
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
The “Cascade” effects actually include two effects connected in a cascade
configuration. Effect number 33 (Flg → Rev), for example, includes cascaded
flanger and reverb.
The illustrations here are not available.
The “Dual” effects include two effects connected in parallel.
The illustrations here are not available.
Clearly, the possibilities for combining effect modes with effect types
allows a large variety of effect system configurations. Further versatility is
provided by a range of parameters that allow the effect signals to be combined
and mixed in a number of ways. The effect signal flow diagrams provided in
the following section should help you understand the effect signal flow and
how the various effect parameter function. Since the signal flow is somewhat
different in the normal voice mode and the other modes (drum voice,
performance, and song), different sets of flow diagrams are provided.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
255
■ Effect Signal Flow Diagrams — Voice Mode
The following diagrams illustrate effect signal flow with different effect
mode and effect type combinations in the normal voice mode. In the diagrams
a diamond (◆) indicates an on/off switch parameter, and a block (■) indicates
a continuously variable level or mix parameter. Although abbreviated in the
diagrams, the direct and effect output signal paths are stereo.
● EFFECT MODE = off.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
256
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = single.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
257
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = dual.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
258
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
259
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
260
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = single.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
261
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = dual.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
262
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
263
■ Effect Signal Flow Diagrams — Drum Voice, Performance,
and Song Modes
The following diagrams illustrate effect signal flow with different effect
mode and effect type combinations in the drum voice, performance, and song
modes. The “Tone Generator” block has slightly different meanings in each of
these modes:
● Drum Voice
“Tone Generator” corresponds to the output from a single drum/
percussion instrument. The other instruments are mixed into the effect
signal path behind the “Dry1” and “Dry2” parameters or the “Switch”
parameters, as indicated by a star (★) in the diagrams.
● Performance
“Tone Generator” corresponds to the output from a single layer. The
other layers are mixed into the effect signal path behind the “Dry1” and
“Dry2” parameters or the “Switch” parameters, as indicated by a star (★)
in the diagrams.
● Song
“Tone Generator” corresponds to the output from a single multi
instrument. The other instruments are mixed into the effect signal path
behind the “Dry1” and “Dry2” parameters or the “Switch” parameters, as
indicated by a star (★) in the diagrams.
In the diagrams a diamond (◆) indicates an on/off switch parameter, and a
block (■) indicates a continuously variable level or mix parameter. Although
abbreviated in the diagrams, the direct and effect signal paths are stereo.
● EFFECT MODE = off.
The illustrations here are not available.
264
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
265
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = single.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
266
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
267
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = dual.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
268
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = serial. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
269
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = single. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
270
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = single.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = single.
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
271
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = cascade. EFFECT 2 = dual.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
272
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = cascade.
(⊗ = effect parameter number 8)
The illustrations here are not available.
● EFFECT MODE = parallel. EFFECT 1 = dual. EFFECT 2 = dual.
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
273
■ The Effects & Their Parameters
* Parameters with “ B ” in the QE column are editable in the Quick Edit modes.
“Single” Effects
• 00 : Through
No.
1~8
PARAMETER
—
RANGE
QE
—
• 01 : Rev. Hall1
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 02 : Rev. Hall2
PARAMETER
Rev.Time [s]
High
Diffusion
Density
ER/Rev Bal [%]
Low Gain [dB]
High Gain [dB]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0.3
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
-12
-12
1.0
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
4
100%
~ +12dB
~ +12dB
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 03 : Rev. Room1, 04 : Rev. Room2, 05 : Rev. Room3
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Rev.Time [s]
High
Diffusion
Init Dly [ms]
Rev.Dly [ms]
Density
ER/Rev Bal [%]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0.3
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
1.0
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
200ms
130ms
4
100%
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
274
PARAMETER
Rev.Time [s]
High
Diffusion
Init Dly [ms]
Rev.Dly [ms]
Density
ER/Rev Bal [%]
LPF [kHz]
APPENDIX /
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Rev.Time [s]
High
Diffusion
Init Dly [ms]
Rev.Dly [ms]
Density
ER/Rev Bal [%]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0.3
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
1.0
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
150ms
100ms
4
100%
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 06 : Rev. Stage1, 07 : Rev. Stage2
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Rev.Time [s]
High
Diffusion
Init Dly [ms]
Rev.Dly [ms]
Density
ER/Rev Bal [%]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0.3
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
1.0
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
60ms
30ms
4
100%
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 09 : Rev. WhRoom, 10 : Rev. Tunnel,
11 : Rev. Canyon, 12 : Rev. Basmnt
• 08 : Rev. Plate
No.
No.
RANGE
0.3
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
1.0
EFFECTS
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
200ms
200ms
4
100%
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Rev.Time [s]
High
Diffusion
Width [m]
Height [m]
Depth [m]
Wall Vary
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0.3
0.1
0 ~
0.5
0.5
0.5
0 ~
1.0
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
~ 23.6m
~ 23.6m
~ 23.6m
30
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 13 : Early Ref1, 14 : Early Ref2
No.
PARAMETER
1
Type
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Room Size
Liveness
Diffusion
Init Dly [ms]
FB Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
LPF [kHz]
• 15 : Gate Rev., 16 : Revrs Gate
RANGE
Smll, Lrge, Rnd,
Rvrs, Plte, Sprg
0.1 ~ 20.0
0 ~ 10
0 ~ 10
0 ~ 150ms
0 ~ 400ms
-99 ~ +99%
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 17 : Dly L, R
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RANGE
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0 ~
-99
0.1
1.0
680ms
680ms
680ms
~ +99%
680ms
~ +99%
~ 1.0
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 19 : St. Echo
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RANGE
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0.1
1.0
340ms
340ms
~ +99%
340ms
340ms
~ +99%
~ 1.0
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 21 : Pit Chnge2
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
Pitch
Fine
Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Pitch
Fine
Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
PARAMETER
Type
Room Size
Liveness
Diffusion
Init Dly [ms]
FB Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
A, B
0.1 ~ 20.0
0 ~ 10
0 ~ 10
0 ~ 150ms
0 ~ 400ms
-99 ~ +99%
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
Cntr Dly [ms]
FB Dly Sync.
FB Gain [%]
FB High
HPF [Hz]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0 ~ 680ms
0 ~ 680ms
0 ~ 680ms
Lch, Rch, Cntr, L, R
-99 ~ +99%
0.1 ~ 1.0
thru, 32 ~ 1000Hz
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 20 : Pit Chnge1
PARAMETER
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
L FB Gain [%]
R Int Dly [ms]
R FB Dly [ms]
R FB Gain [%]
FB High
LPF [kHz]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 18 : Dly L, C, R
PARAMETER
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB1 Dly [ms]
FB1 Gain [%]
FB2 Dly [ms]
FB2 Gain [%]
FB High
LPF [kHz]
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
1 Pitch
1 Fine
1 Dly [ms]
2 Pitch
2 Fine
2 Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
1/2 Bal. [%]
RANGE
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0 ~ 300ms
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0 ~ 300ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 22 : Pit Chnge3
RANGE
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0 ~ 300ms
-99 ~ +99%
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0 ~ 300ms
-99 ~ +99%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
1 Pitch
1 Fine
2 Pitch
2 Fine
3 Pitch
3 Fine
Dly Time [ms]
FB Gain [%]
RANGE
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0 ~ 600ms
-99 ~ +99%
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
QE
B
B
B
B
275
• 23 : Aural Exc. (Aural Exciter®*)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
HPF [kHz]
Enhance [%]
Exc Level [%]
Init Dly [ms]
—
—
—
—
• 24 : EG Flanger
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
0.0 ~ 99.9ms
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Atck Time [ms]
Atck Level [%]
Rlse Time [ms]
EG Target
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
RANGE
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
0 ~ 100%
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
Freq, Dpth
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0.1 ~ 99.9ms
0 ~ 99%
QE
B
B
B
B
* Aural Exciter® is a registered trademark and is manufactured
under license from APHEX Systems Ltd.
• 25: EG Chorus
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 26 : EG Sympho
PARAMETER
Atck Time [ms]
Atck Level [%]
Rlse Time [ms]
EG Target
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
0 ~ 100%
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
Freq, Dpth
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
-12 ~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 27 : EG Phaser
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
276
Atck Time [ms]
Atck Level [%]
Rlse Time [ms]
EG Target
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
0 ~ 100%
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
Freq, Dpth
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0.1 ~ 5.0ms
-12 ~ +12dB
PARAMETER
Atck Time [ms]
Atck Level [%]
Rlse Time [ms]
EG Target
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Init Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
0 ~ 100%
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
Freq, Dpth
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 300ms
-12 ~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mid Speed [Hz]
Depth [%]
TransTime [ms]
Sped Diff [Hz]
L/M/H Switch
Low Gain [dB]
High Gain [dB]
—
RANGE
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
2.0ms ~ 22.0s
0.05 ~ 5.80Hz
Low, Mid, High
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 30 : D.Flt (Wah)
PARAMETER
Wave Type
Wave Freq [Hz]
PM Freq. [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Freq. [Hz]
AM Depth [%]
Low Gain [dB]
High Gain [dB]
APPENDIX /
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 28 : Rotary SP.
PARAMETER
• 29 : Ring Mod.
No.
No.
RANGE
tri, dwn, up, squ, sin
1 ~ 180Hz
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
EFFECTS
QE
No.
B
B
B
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Flt Freq [kHz]
Flt1 Q
Flt1 Gain [dB]
Flt2 Q
Wah Dly [ms]
FB Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
RANGE
315Hz ~ 14.0kHz
1.0 ~ 5.0
0 ~ +12dB
0.1 ~ 0.7
0 ~ 680ms
0 ~ 680ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
“Cascade” Effects
• 31 : Dly → Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 32 : Echo → Rev
PARAMETER
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
ER/Rev Bal [%]
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
0 ~
400ms
400ms
~ +99%
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
100%
~ 16.0kHz, thru
100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 33 : Flg → Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.3
0.1
1.0
0 ~
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 30.0ms
99%
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
~ 16.0kHz, thru
100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 35 : Sym → Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Lch Dly [ms]
L FB Gain [%]
Rch Dly [ms]
R FB Gain [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
0 ~
-99
0 ~
-99
0.3
0.1
1.0
0 ~
200ms
~ +99%
200ms
~ +99%
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
~ 16.0kHz, thru
100%
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
0 ~
~ 40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
200ms
~ 16.0kHz, thru
100%
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
0 ~
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
200ms
~ 16.0kHz, thru
100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
• 36 : Pha → Rev
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 34 : Cho → Rev
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
No.
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
-12
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
0 ~
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ +12dB
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
200ms
~ 16.0kHz, thru
100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
QE
B
B
B
B
277
• 37 : Pit → Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 38 : Exc → Rev (Aural Exciter®*)
PARAMETER
L Pitch
L Fine
R Pitch
R Fine
Rev. Time [s]
High
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0.1~ 1.5
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
HPF [kHz]
Enhance [%]
Exc Level [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
QE
B
B
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0 .1~ 1.5
0 ~ 200ms
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
0 ~ 100%
B
B
* Aural Exciter® is a registered trademark and is manufactured
under license from APHEX Systems Ltd.
• 39 : Dist → Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 40 : Pan → Rev
PARAMETER
Dist. Level [%]
Mid. Freq [kHz]
Mid. Gain [dB]
Trbl Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
0 ~ 100%
315Hz ~ 6.3kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
0 .3~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
0 ~ 100%
QE
No.
B
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
B
• 41 : Flg → Dly
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
278
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0 ~
QE
B
B
B
B
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 30.0ms
99%
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0 ~
~ 40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
100%
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0 ~
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 44 : Pha → Dly
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod Depth [%]
—
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
APPENDIX /
RANGE
L→R, R→L, L<>R
1 ~ 52
-100 ~ +100%
0 ~ 100%
0 .3~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
0 ~ 100%
• 42 : Cho → Dly
PARAMETER
• 43 : Sym → Dly
No.
PARAMETER
Type
Speed
Fade In [%]
L/R Depth [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
LPF [kHz]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
—
-12
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0 ~
EFFECTS
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ +12dB
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
• 45 : Pit → Dly
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
L Pitch
L Fine
R Pitch
R Fine
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
• 46 : Exc → Dly (Aural Exciter®*)
RANGE
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0 ~ 600ms
0 ~ 600ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
HPF [kHz]
Enhance [%]
Exc Level [%]
Init Dly [ms]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
RANGE
QE
B
B
500Hz ~ 16kHz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
0.0 ~ 80.0ms
0 ~ 600ms
0 ~ 600ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
B
B
* Aural Exciter® is a registered trademark and is manufactured
under license from APHEX Systems Ltd.
• 47 : Dist → Dly
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Dist. Level [%]
Mid. Freq [kHz]
Mid. Gain [dB]
Trbl Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
• 48 : Pan → Dly
RANGE
0 ~ 100%
315Hz ~ 6.3kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
0 ~ 680ms
0 ~ 680ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 49 : Dist → Echo
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Dist. Level [%]
Mid. Freq [kHz]
Mid. Gain [dB]
Trbl Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Echo Level [%]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
Rev Level [%]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Type
Speed
Fade In [%]
L/R Depth [%]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
RANGE
L→R, R→L, L<>R
1 ~ 52
-100 ~ +100%
0 ~ 100%
0~ 680ms
0~ 680ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 50 : EQ → Rev1
RANGE
0 ~ 100%
315Hz ~ 6.3kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
0 ~ 340ms
0 ~ 340ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 51 : EQ → Rev2
No.
No.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq. [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
ER/Rev Bal [%]
Rev Level [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 52 : EQ → ER
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
0 ~ 250ms
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
PARAMETER
1
2
3
4
5
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Type
6
7
8
Diffusion
Init Dly [ms]
ER Level [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
Smll, Lrge, Rnd,
Rvrs, Plte, Sprg
0 ~ 10
0 ~ 200ms
0 ~ 100%
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
QE
B
B
B
B
279
• 53 : EQ → Dly
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 54 : EQ → Echo
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Dly Level [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0 ~ 680ms
0 ~ 680ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 55 : EQ → Flg
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
Flg Level [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
280
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Init Dly [ms]
Sym Level [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 300ms
0 ~ 100%
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0 ~ 340ms
0 ~ 340ms
-99 ~ +99%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
Cho Level [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Pha Level [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
0.1 ~ 5.0ms
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
• 60 : EQ → Pan
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
L Fine
R Fine
Init Dly [ms]
Pit Level [%]
APPENDIX /
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Echo Level [%]
• 58 : EQ → Pha
• 59 : EQ → Pit
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 56 : EQ → Cho
• 57 : EQ → Sym
No.
No.
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
-999 ~ +999
-999 ~ +999
0 ~ 300ms
0 ~ 100%
EFFECTS
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Low Freq [kHz]
Low Gain [dB]
High Frq [kHz]
High Gain [dB]
Type
Speed
Fade In [%]
L/R Depth [%]
RANGE
32Hz ~ 2.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
L→R, R→L, L<>R
1 ~ 52
-100 ~ +100%
0 ~ 100%
QE
B
B
B
B
“Dual” Effects
• 61 : Hall & Plate
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 62 : Echo & Rev
PARAMETER
Rev. Time [s]
High
Diffusion
LPF [kHz]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Diffusion
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
~ 16.0kHz, thru
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
No.
B
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
B
• 63 : Flg & Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 30.0ms
99%
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
200ms
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 65 : Sym & Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RANGE
0 ~
-99
0 ~
-99
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
200ms
~ +99%
200ms
~ +99%
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
100%
~ 16.0kHz, thru
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
~ 40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
200ms
~ 16.0kHz, thru
0.1
0 ~
0.1
-12
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
200ms
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
• 64 : Cho & Rev
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod Dly [ms]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
PARAMETER
Lch Dly [ms]
L FB Gain [%]
Rch Dly [ms]
R FB Gain [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
ER/Rev Bal [%]
LPF [kHz]
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
• 66 : Pha & Rev
PARAMETER
RANGE
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
—
High Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
0.1 ~ 40.0Hz
0 ~ 100%
-12
0.3
0.1
0 ~
1.0
~ +12dB
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
200ms
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
QE
B
B
B
B
281
• 67 : Pit & Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 68 : Exc & Rev (Aural Exciter®*)
PARAMETER
L Pitch
L Fine
R Pitch
R Fine
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
0 ~ 200ms
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
HPF [kHz]
Enhance [%]
Exc Level [%]
Init Dly [ms]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
QE
B
B
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
0.0 ~ 50.0ms
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
0 ~ 200ms
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
B
B
* Aural Exciter® is a registered trademark and is manufactured
under license from APHEX Systems Ltd.
• 69 : Dist & Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 70 : Pan & Rev
PARAMETER
Dist. Level [%]
Mid. Freq [kHz]
Mid. Gain [dB]
Trbl Gain [dB]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0 ~ 100%
315Hz ~ 6.3kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
0 ~ 200ms
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
No.
B
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B
B
• 71 : Dly & Rev
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
282
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Diffusion
ER/Rev Bal [%]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0 ~
0 ~
-99
0.3
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
1.0
QE
B
B
B
B
400ms
400ms
~ +99%
~ 30.0s
~ 1.5
10
100%
~ 16.0kHz, thru
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [%]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
0 ~
0 ~
-99
-12
0 ~
0 ~
-99
-12
340ms
340ms
~ +99%
~ +12dB
340ms
340ms
~ +99%
~ +12dB
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0 ~
0 ~
-99
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 74 : Cho & Dly
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [ms]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
APPENDIX /
RANGE
L→R, R→L, L<>R
1 ~ 52
-100 ~ +100%
0 ~ 100%
0.3 ~ 30.0s
0.1 ~ 1.5
0 ~ 150ms
1.0 ~ 16.0kHz, thru
• 72 : Dly & Dly
PARAMETER
• 73 : Flg & Dly
No.
PARAMETER
Pan Type
Speed
Fade In [%]
L/R Depth [%]
Rev. Time [s]
High
Init Dly [ms]
LPF [kHz]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
0 ~
-99
-12
EFFECTS
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 30.0ms
99%
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
• 75 : Sym & Dly
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 76 : Pha & Dly
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
—
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
—
-12
0 ~
0 ~
-99
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ +12dB
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 77 : Pit & Dly
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
RANGE
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod Depth [%]
Mod Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
0.1
0 ~
0.1
-12
0 ~
0 ~
-99
-12
QE
B
B
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
600ms
600ms
~ +99%
~ +12dB
B
B
• 78 : Exc & Dly (Aural Exciter®*)
PARAMETER
L Pitch
L Fine
R Pitch
R Fine
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
No.
RANGE
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
-24 ~ +24
-100 ~ +100
0 ~ 600ms
0 ~ 600ms
-99 ~ +99%
-12 ~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
RANGE
HPF [kHz]
Enhance [%]
Exc Level [%]
Init Dly [ms]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
QE
B
B
500Hz ~ 16.0kHz
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 100%
0.0 ~ 80.0ms
0 ~ 600ms
0 ~ 600ms
-99 ~ +99%
-12 ~ +12dB
B
B
* Aural Exciter® is a registered trademark and is manufactured
under license from APHEX Systems Ltd.
• 79 : Dist & Dly
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 80 : Pan & Dly
PARAMETER
Dist. Level [%]
Mid. Freq [kHz]
Mid. Gain [dB]
Trbl Gain [dB]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
0 ~ 100%
315Hz ~ 6.3kHz
-12 ~ +12dB
-12 ~ +12dB
0 ~ 680ms
0 ~ 680ms
-99 ~ +99%
-12 ~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 81 : Flg & Flg
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Freq [Hz]
Depth [%]
Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Freq [Hz]
Depth [%]
Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
RANGE
Type
Speed
Fade In [%]
L/R Depth [%]
Lch Dly [ms]
Rch Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
High Gain [dB]
L→R, R→L, L<>R
1 ~ 52
-100 ~ +100%
0 ~ 100%
0 ~ 680ms
0 ~ 680ms
-99 ~ +99%
-12 ~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 82 : Flg & Cho
PARAMETER
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
No.
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 99.9ms
99%
~40.0Hz
100%
~ 99.9ms
99%
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
RANGE
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 99.9ms
99%
~40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
APPENDIX /
EFFECTS
QE
B
B
B
B
283
• 83 : Flg & Sym
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 84 : Flg & Pha
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
Mod. FB Gain [%]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Init Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 99.9ms
99%
~40.0Hz
100%
300ms
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 85 : Cho & Cho
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[Hz]
[%]
[%]
[dB]
[Hz]
[%]
[%]
[dB]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
~40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
• 87 : Cho & Pha
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
284
PARAMETER
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
High
Freq [Hz]
Depth [%]
Dly [ms]
FB Gain [%]
Freq [Hz]
Depth [%]
Dly [ms]
Gain [dB]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.1
0 ~
0.1
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 99.9ms
99%
~40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
~40.0Hz
100%
300ms
~ +12dB
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
300ms
~ +12dB
~40.0Hz
100%
300ms
~ +12dB
0.1
0 ~
0.1
-12
0.1
0 ~
0.1
-12
~ 40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
~40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0.1
0 ~
0.1
-12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
PM Depth [%]
AM Depth [%]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Init Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
~ 40.0Hz
100%
100%
~ +12dB
~40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod.Depth [%]
Init Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Init Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
• 90 : Pha & Pha
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Init Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
Mod. Freq [Hz]
Mod. Depth [%]
Mod. Dly [ms]
High Gain [dB]
APPENDIX /
No.
• 88 : Sym & Sym
• 89 : Sym & Pha
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• 86 : Cho & Sym
PARAMETER
Mod. Freq
PM Depth
AM Depth
High Gain
Mod. Freq
PM Depth
AM Depth
High Gain
No.
RANGE
0.1
0 ~
0 ~
-12
0.1
0 ~
0.1
-12
EFFECTS
~ 40.0Hz
100%
300ms
~ +12dB
~40.0Hz
100%
~ 5.0ms
~ +12dB
QE
B
B
B
B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PARAMETER
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
High
Mod.
Mod.
Mod.
High
Freq [Hz]
Depth [%]
Dly [ms]
Gain [dB]
Freq [Hz]
Depth [%]
Dly [ms]
Gain [dB]
RANGE
QE
B
B
B
B
WAVE MEMORY EXPANSION
The SY85 comes with 512 kilobytes of internal wave RAM memory for
storage of wave data loaded from floppy disk or via the MIDI interface (MIDI
sample dump). The internal wave memory is not backed up like the voice,
performance, and song memories, and is therefore “volatile” (i.e. the contents
of the memory are lost when the SY85 power is turned off).
Extra memory modules can be added to the SY85 to expand the wave
memory to a maximum of 3.5 megabytes. Two types of expansion memory are
available:
Yamaha SYEMB06 Memory Expansion Modules
One or two Yamaha SYEMB06 Memory Expansion Modules can be
plugged into expansion slots provided on the SY85 bottom panel. Each
SYEMB06 provides 512 kilobytes. With two SYEMB06 modules installed,
you have a total of 1.5 megabytes of wave memory (512 kilobytes internal
+ 1 megabyte external). Unlike the internal wave memory, SYEMB06
memory is “non-volatile”, so its contents are retained even when the SY85
power is turned off.
SIMM Memory Modules
The SY85 will also accommodate up to 2 megabytes of memory in
standard SIMM memory modules (the type used in popular personal computers: 8-bit, 1-megabyte, 80-nanosecond or faster types only). SIMM
memory is volatile, so its contents will be lost whenever the SY85 power is
turned off.
Please note that when SIMM memory is wave memory installed, wave
data can not be loaded into memory from a waveform card.
APPENDIX /
WAVE MEMORY EXPANSION
285
■ Memory Installation
CAUTION
Memory Installation can erase internal memory!
Be sure to safe all internal data to disk or card before installing
memory.
1
Turn the SY85 power switch OFF, and disconnect the AC power cord
from the mains outlet.
2
Place the SY85 face down on a stable, padded surface.
3
Locate the small cover on the bottom panel, and remove the six screws
that hold it in place (figure 1).
The illustrations here are not available.
4
Below the cover you will see two recessed panels. The left panel has
slots for two SYEMB06 Memory Expansion Modules, while the right panel
accomodates two SIMM memory modules. While both SIMM modules must
be installed at the same time, you can install either one or two SYEMB06
modules, as required.
286
APPENDIX /
WAVE MEMORY EXPANSION
5
INSTALLING SYEMB06 MODULES: A RAM card adapter (provided)
is required to install SYEMB06 modules. Assemble the SYEMB06 and
adapter as shown in figure 3.
The illustrations here are not available.
6
When installing a single SYEMB06 use slot number 1 (figure 4). Install
a second SYEMB06 in slot number 2. If you will not be installing SIMM
memory modules skip ahead to step number 8.
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
WAVE MEMORY EXPANSION
287
7
INSTALLING SIMM MODULES: The right panel accomodates compatible SIMM memory modules. Two SIMM modules (1 megabyte each) must
be installed in connector CN13.
Keyboard
SIMM
The illustrations here are not available.
8
Replace the expansion slot cover and attach with the six screws removed
in step 3.
IMPORTANT
288
APPENDIX /
Once installed, SYEMB06 memory expansion modules cannot
be removed (the plastic rivets lock the boards in place). Have
your Yamaha dealer remove installed modules to avoid possible
damage.
WAVE MEMORY EXPANSION
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
● INITIAL PERFORMANCE “InitPerf”
Performance Name
Voice Number
Total Level
InitPerf
A :
I IA1
C :
I IA1
Layer
B :
D :
80
A
B
C
D
R1
+0
+0
+0
+0
R2, R3
+0
+0
+0
+0
I IA1
Quick Edit
I IA1
AEG
A
B
C
D
Volume
127
127
127
127
R4
+0
+0
+0
+0
Pan
+0
+0
+0
+0
RR
+0
+0
+0
+0
Note Shift
+0
+0
+0
+0
Vel. Sense
+0
+0
+0
+0
Fine Tune
+0
+0
+0
+0
Speed
+0
+0
+0
+0
Note Limit
C-2~G8
C-2~G8
C-2~G8
C-2~G8
Depth
+0
+0
+0
+0
Vel. Limit
1~127
1~127
1~127
1~127
CS3 Enable
off
off
off
off
Resonance
CS4 Enable
off
off
off
off
Vel. Sense
+0
+0
+0
+0
A
1a
1b
2a
2b
B
1a
1b
2a
2b
C
1a
1b
2a
2b
D
Con-
AT LyrA LyrA LyrA LyrA
1a
1b
2a
2b
trol
MW LyrA LyrA LyrA LyrA
Level
127
127
127
127
Vel.Sense
+0
+0
+0
+0
Key.Scale
+0
D1
D2
+0
D1
D2
+0
D1
D2
+0
D1
D2
Effect Send
Switch
Dry Output
Select
Effect
Effect 1
Mode
off
/
serial
Type 06
:
Rev.Stage1
Output Level a
Param. P1 2.2
Effect 2
Type
P2
57 :
/
P3
P2
Cutoff
FC LyrA LyrA LyrA LyrA
AT > MW
off
off
off
off
MW > AT
off
off
off
off
Sustain
on
on
on
on
Pitch EG
on
on
on
on
Fixed Note
Output Level b
8
P4
8
P5
Wet : Dry 50 : 50
0
P6
4
P7
65
P8 Thru
EQ → Sym
Output Level a
Param. P1 500
Filter
parallel
100
0.7
LFO
Output Level b
+0
P3 3.2
P4
P5 0.8
+0
Wet : Dry 50 : 50
100
P6
60
Mix Level
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
off
Min
0
Max
100
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
off
Min
0
Max
100
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
tri
Insert 1b
Insert 2a
Speed
APPENDIX /
0
P7
0
P8
Insert 2b
Delay
100
0
0
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
289
● INITIAL NORMAL VOICE “InitVce”
Voice Name
InitVce
Oscillator
Mode
normal
Waveform
P244 Sin
Fine Tune
/
fixed
127
0°
Phase
LFO
Waveform
tri
+0
Speed
64
Fixed Note
+0
Depth
Random
0
SpeedSens Random
Reverse
off
Amplitude EG
Mode
Scaling
63
L2
63
L3
63
R2
63
R3
63
BP1
BP2
BP3
BP4
Note
C1
G2
E4
Offset
+0
+0
+0
Filter
Cutoff freq
EG
Pmod
Delay
Amod
0
R4
0
RR
Sensitivity
0
0
Fmod
Vel.
0
Key Scale
atk / hold
R1 / HT
0
+0
+0
50
Velocity
+0
C6
Atk Rate Vel
+0
+0
Rate Scaling
+0
Type THRU Band
CTRL
Reso
LFO
L0
+0
L1
+0
L1
+0
L3
+0
L4
+0
RL1
+0
RL2
+0
RS
+0
R1
+0
R2
+0
R3
+0
R4
+0
RR1 +0
RR2
+0
Scaling
BP1
BP2
BP3
BP4
Note
C1
G2
E4
C6
Velocity
+0
Offset
+0
+0
+0
+0
Attack Rate Vel
+0
Pitch
Range
EG
Controller
290
Total Level
1 oct
Velocity
+0
Sensitivity
Rate Velocity
L0
+0
L1
+0
L2
+0
L3
+0
RL1
+0
RS
63
R1
63
R2
63
R3
63
RR
63
PB Range
Volume Low Limit
2
+0
Loop
Amod
0
Pmod
0
Fmod
0
EG Bias
+0
Cutoff
+0
FC
Amod
0
Pmod
0
Fmod
0
EG Bias
+0
Cutoff
+0
AT
Amod
0
Pmod
0
Fmod
0
EG Bias
+0
Cutoff
+0
CS3(#=18) Parameter
Min
0
Max
100
CS4(#=19) Parameter
Min
0
Max
100
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
on
Sustain SW
0
MW
APPENDIX /
EGshift
Type
/
off
enable
Pitch Bias
Effect
Mode
Effect 1
off
Type: 06 :
/
serial
Effect 2
P2
parallel
Send
EF2 Mix
127
Rev.Stage1
Output Level a
Param. P1 2.2
/
Output Level b
100
0.7
P3
8
P4
P5
8
P6
0
Wet :Dry
50 : 50
P8 Thru
4
P7
65
60
P7
0
Type: 57 : EQ → Sym
Output Level a
Param. P1 500
P2
Output Level b
+0
P3
3.2
P4
+0
P5
100
0.8
P6
Control 1
Parameter
off
Min
0
Max
100
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
off
Min
0
Max
100
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
tri
Speed
APPENDIX /
0
Delay
P8
100
0
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
291
● INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR PTN”
Voice Name
DR PTN
Total Level
Vol Lo Limit
127
Key Parameters
Note
Effect Send
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
Gate
Rvs
EF1
EF2
Lvel
VelS DryOut
C1
P156 BD6
120
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#1
P155 BD5
120
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D1
P154 BD4
121
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#1
P153 BD3
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E1
P170 Tom2
103
-6
+0
-24
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
97
+0
1 2
F1
P170 Tom2
105
-1
+0
-8
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
90
+0
1 2
F#1
P170 Tom2
112
+3
+0
+8
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
95
+0
1 2
G1
P170 Tom2
119
+8
+0
+21
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
98
+0
1 2
G#1
P152 BD2
115
-3
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A1
P151 BD1
119
-5
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#1
P162 SD4
119
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
109
+0
1 2
B1
P169 Tom1
127
-4
+0
-29
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
94
+0
1 2
C2
P169 Tom1
127
+0
+0
-10
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
98
+0
1 2
C#2
P160 SD2
127
-1
-21
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
123
+2
1 2
D2
P169 Tom1
127
+6
+0
+9
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
89
+0
1 2
D#2
P168 SDside
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
124
+3
1 2
E2
P161 SD3
127
-2
+0
+0
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
113
+3
1 2
F2
P169 Tom1
127
+12
+0
+20
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
92
+0
1 2
F#2
P193 Clap
127
+0
+0
+8
off short off
a
b
a
b
99
+0
1 2
G2
P196 Cowbell
127
+0
+0
+13
off short off
a
b
a
b
104
+0
1 2
G#2
P188 Cabasa
127
-5
+0
-26
off short off
a
b
a
b
90
+0
1 2
A2
P173 HH light 127
+0
+0
+12
1
short off
a
b
a
b
111
+0
1 2
A#2
P174 HH mid
127
+0
+0
+12
1
norm
off
a
b
a
b
94
+0
1 2
B2
P171 HH Open
127
+0
+0
+12
1
long
off
a
b
a
b
87
+0
1 2
C3
P176 Crash
127
+0
+0
-11
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
102
+0
1 2
C#3
P176 Crash
127
+3
+1
-5
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
109
+0
1 2
D3
P177 Ride
127
+0
+0
+8
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
107
+0
1 2
D#3
P178 RideBell 127
+0
+0
+17
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
107
+0
1 2
P189 CongaLo
+2
+0
-17
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
100
+0
1 2
E3
292
Waveform
0
APPENDIX /
97
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
Key Parameters
Effect Send
Note
Waveform
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
F3
P190 CongaMt
116
+0
+0
+8
F#3
P191 CongaSlp 117
+0
+0
G3
P187 Bongo
127
+0
G#3
P187 Bongo
127
A3
P201 Timbale
A#3
EF1
EF2
Lvel
off norm off
a
b
a
b
100
+0
1 2
+19
off norm off
a
b
a
b
100
+0
1 2
+0
-15
off short off
a
b
a
b
98
+0
1 2
+3
+0
+15
off norm off
a
b
a
b
99
+0
1 2
100
-4
+0
-2
off norm off
a
b
a
b
99
+0
1 2
P201 Timbale
108
-1
+0
+22
off norm off
a
b
a
b
99
+0
1 2
B3
P198 Tmbrine
127
+0
+0
-12
off norm off
a
b
a
b
101
+0
1 2
C4
P194 Clave
127
+0
+0
-25
off short off
a
b
a
b
108
+0
1 2
C#4
P200 Temp1B1K 127
+0
+0
+30
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D4
P186 AgogoHi
98
-3
+0
-21
off long off
a
b
a
b
102
+0
1 2
D#4
P186 AgogoHi
102
+2
+0
-7
off long off
a
b
a
b
104
+0
1 2
E4
P204 Whistle
127
-2
+0
+13
off norm off
a
b
a
b
97
+0
1 2
F4
P157 BD7
104
-3
+0
+0
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#4
P195 AnaCwbl
127
+0
+0
-24
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G4
P158 BD8
104
-4
+0
+0
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#4
P181 HHclAnlg 127
+3
+37
+0
norm off
a
b
a
b
113
+0
1 2
A4
P166 SD8
127
-2
-23
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#4
P180 HHopAnlg 127
+0
+0
+0
short off
a
b
a
b
111
+0
1 2
B4
P167 SD9
127
-6
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C5
P116 SynBs6
127
-12
+0
+0
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
Effect
Mode
Effect 1
Type: 50
off
:
/
serial
/
Effect 2
P2
Type: 52 :
1
Output Level b
+12
P3 500
P4
+12
P5
Wet : Dry 100 :
100
P6 0.9
1.4
P7
P8
86
0
36
EQ→ER
Output Level b
P2 +12
P3
500
Wet : Dry 100 :
100
P4 +12
P5 smll
100
Insert 2a
P6
10
Mix Level
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
Ef1 prm8
Min
0
Max
98
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
Ef2 prm8
Min
0
Max
42
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
VelS DryOut
EQ→Rev1
Output Level a
Param. P1 2.0
1
Rvs
parallel
Output Level a
Param. P1 2.0
Gate
Insert 1b
tri
Speed
APPENDIX /
0
P7
P8
0
Insert 2b
Delay
0
9
100
0
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
293
● INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR Zones”
Voice Name
DR Zones
Total Level
Vol Lo Limit
127
Key Parameters
Note
294
Waveform
0
Effect Send
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
Gate
Rvs
EF1
EF2
Lvel
VelS DryOut
C1
P151 BD1
127
+0
+3
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#1
P152 BD2
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D1
P153 BD3
127
+0
+0
+0
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#1
P154 BD4
127
-1
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E1
P155 BD5
127
+0
+0
+0
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F1
P156 BD6
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#1
P157 BD7
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G1
P158 BD8
127
-2
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#1
P159 SD1
127
+0
+0
+0
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A1
P160 SD2
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#1
P161 SD3
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
B1
P162 SD4
127
+2
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C2
P163 SD5
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#2
P164 SD6
127
+0
+0
+0
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D2
P165 SD7
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#2
P166 SD8
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E2
P167 SD9
127
+0
+0
+0
off
long
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F2
P168 SDside
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#2
P169 Tom1
127
-5
+0
+20
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G2
P169 Tom1
127
+0
+0
+10
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#2
P169 Tom1
127
+3
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A2
P169 Tom1
127
+6
+0
-10
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#2
P170 Tom2
127
-6
+0
+20
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
B2
P170 Tom2
127
-3
-14
+10
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C3
P170 Tom2
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#3
P170 Tom2
127
+4
+0
-10
off
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D3
P171 HH Open
127
+0
+0
+0
1
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#3
P172 HH Pedal 127
+0
+0
+0
1
norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E3
P173 HH light 127
+0
+0
+0
1
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
Key Parameters
Note
Waveform
Effect Send
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
Gate
Rvs
EF1
EF2
Lvel
VelS DryOut
F3
P174 HH mid
127
+0
+0
+0
1
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#3
P175 HH heavy 127
+0
+0
+0
1
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G3
P180 HHopAnlg 127
+0
+0
+0
2
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#3
P181 HHclAnlg 127
+0
+0
+0
2
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A3
P176 Crash
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#3
P177 Ride
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
B3
P178 RideBell 127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C4
P179 AnlgTom
127
-7
+0
-20
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#4
P179 AnlgTom
127
-5
+0
-10
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D4
P179 AnlgTom
127
-1
+0
+0
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#4
P179 AnlgTom
127
+1
+0
+10
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E4
P179 AnlgTom
127
+4
+0
+20
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F4
P192 AnaConga 127
+0
+0
-10
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#4
P192 AnaConga 127
-3
+0
+10
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G4
P193 Clap
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#4
P195 AnaCwbl
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A4
P194 Clave
127
-3
+0
+0
5
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#4
P183 RezClick 127
+0
+0
-15
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
B4
P198 Tmbrine
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C5
P122 SynBs9
127
-24
+0
+0
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
Effect
Mode
Effect 1
Type:
off
47 :
/
serial
/
parallel
Dist → Dly
Output Level a
Param. P1
Effect 2
25
Output Level b
P2 2.5
P3
+8
P4
P5 500
+2
Wet : Dry 70 : 30
100%
P6 250
P7 +30
P8
0
Type: 50 : EQ → Rev1
Output Level a
Param. P1
200
P2
Output Level b
+12
P3
800
P4
P5
+6
Wet : Dry 40 : 60
100%
1.3
P6 0.8
Mix Level
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
Out2 wet
Min
0
Max
100
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
EF1 prm8
Min
0
Max
35
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
Insert 1b
tri
Insert 2a
100
Speed
APPENDIX /
0
P7
13
P8
Insert 2b
Delay
18
100
0
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
295
● INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR GMIDI”
Voice Name
DR GMIDI
Total Level
Vol Lo Limit
127
Key Parameters
Note
296
Waveform
0
Effect Send
VelS DryOut
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
Gate
Rvs
EF1
EF2
Lvel
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C1
P151 BD1
127
+0
+3
+0
off
C#1
P168 SDside
127
+2
+0
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D1
P160 SD2
127
+0
+0
+0
off
long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#1
P193 Clap
127
+1
+0
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E1
P166 SD8
127
+1
+0
+0
off
long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F1
P169 Tom1
127
-8
+0
-18
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#1
P174 HH mid
127
+1
+0
+0
1
long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G1
P169 Tom1
127
-6
+0
-16
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#1
P172 HH Pedal 127
+0
+0
+0
1
long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A1
P169 Tom1
127
-3
+0
-12
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#1
P171 HH Open
127
+2
+0
+0
1
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
B1
P169 Tom1
127
+2
+0
-6
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C2
P169 Tom1
127
+7
+0
+3
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#2
P176 Crash
127
+0
+0
-10
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D2
P169 Tom1
127
+12
+0
+10
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#2
P177 Ride
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E2
P176 Crash
127
-4
+0
+15
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F2
P178 RideBell 127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#2
P198 Tmbrine
127
-2
+0
+0
off
long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G2
P176 Crash
127
-8
+0
+15
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#2
P196 Cowbell
127
+0
+0
+15
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A2
P176 Crash
127
+0
+0
+0
off
on
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#2
P191 CongaSlp 127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
B2
P177 Ride
127
-2
-14
+0
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C3
P187 Bongo
127
+3
+0
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#3
P187 Bongo
127
-2
-2
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D3
P190 CongaMt
127
+0
-14
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#3
P189 CongaLo
127
+5
+0
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E3
P189 CongaLo
127
+0
+0
+0
off
norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
verylong
verylong
verylong
verylong
verylong
Key Parameters
Note
Waveform
F3
P201 Timbale
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
Vol.
Effect Send
EF1
EF2
Lvel
VelS DryOut
verylong
a
b
a
b
off
127
1 2
off
verylong
a
b
a
b
off
127
1 2
+15
off
verylong
a
b
a
b
off
127
1 2
+0
+0
off
norm
a
b
a
b
off
127
1 2
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
-5
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
Tune
Pan
AltG
Gate
Rvs
P183 127
+0
+0
+0
5
P201 Timbale
RezClick 127
+0
+0
-15
P186
P218 127
4
+0
OrchHit2 127
+0
127
+0
127
AgogoHi
P186
AgogoHi
Nsft
B3
P188 Cabaso
127
+0
+0
+25
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C4
P197 Maracas
127
-5
+0
+19
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C#4
P204 Whistle
127
+0
+0
-20
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D4
P204 Whistle
127
+0
+0
-18
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
D#4
P195 AnaCwbl
127
-2
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
E4
P179 AnlgTom
127
-4
+0
+0
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F4
P194 Clave
127
+0
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
F#4
P192 AnaConga 127
+0
+0
+0
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G4
P194 Clave
127
-4
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
G#4
P184 VcDrmBD
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A4
P185 VcDrmSD
127
-10
+0
+25
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
A#4
P203 Triangle 127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
B4
P203 Triangle 127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
C5
P183 RezClick 127
+0
+0
+0
5
short off
a
b
a
b
127
+0
1 2
Effect
Mode
Effect 1
off
/
serial
Type: +0 :
Effect 2
Type:
→
P2
+8 :
Output Level a
Param. P1
50
parallel
+0
Output Level a
Param. P1
/
+0
Output Level b
P3
P4 100% P5
500
Output Level b
Dly
70
P6
30
P7
25
P8 2.5
+2
P2 EQ → P3 Rev1 P4
Mix Level
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
0.8
Min
Control 2
Parameter
13
Min
Effect LFO Waveform
Wet : Dry 47 : Dist
+0
Insert 1b
+12
EF1 prm8
P5 100%
Insert 2a
800
Max
18
100
Max
Speed
Wet : Dry +30 :
250
0
P6
36
P7
64
P8 200
Insert 2b
+6
1.3
Additional
100
Additional
Out2 wet
Delay
0
0
100
35
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
297
● INITIAL DRUM VOICE “DR Efect”
Voice Name
DR Efect
Total Level
Vol Lo Limit
127
Effect Send
Key Parameters
298
0
Note
Waveform
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
Gate
Rvs
EF1
EF2
Lvel
VelS DryOut
C1
P145 Marimba
127
-20
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
C#1
P152 BD2
127
-9
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
D1
P150 Xylophon
127
-1
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
D#1
P159 SD1
127
-9
+0
+0
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
E1
P160 SD2
127
-10
+14
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
F1
P161 SD3
127
-6
-57
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
F#1
P162 SD4
127
+2
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
G1
P163 SD5
127
-2
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
G#1
P169 Tom1
127
-6
+0
+0
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
A1
P169 Tom1
127
+0
+0
+0
off long off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
A#1
P169 Tom1
127
-9
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
B1
P018 PrcOrgl
127
-20
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
C2
P170 Tom2
127
-17
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
C#2
P170 Tom2
127
-5
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
D2
P170 Tom2
127
+7
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
D#2
P164 SD6
127
-8
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
E2
P172 HH Pedal 127
-10
+0
+0
1
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
F2
P171 HH Open
127
+26
+0
+0
1
long off
a
b
a
b
127
+2
1 2
F#2
P178 RideBell 127
+25
+0
+0
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
G2
P177 Ride
127
+5
+0
+0
off short off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
G#2
P176 Crash
127
+24
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
A2
P176 Crash
127
+31
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
A#2
P176 Crash
127
+11
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
B2
P168 SDside
127
-14
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
C3
P203 Triangle 127
+8
+0
+0
2
off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
C#3
P203 Triangle 127
+21
-1
+0
2
long off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
D3
P199 Timpani
127
+0
+0
+0
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+3
1 2
D#3
P196 Cowbell
127
-25
-9
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
E3
P196 Cowbell
127
-15
+0
+0
off norm off
a
b
a
b
127
+7
1 2
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
verylong
verylong
verylong
verylong
Key Parameters
Effect Send
Note
Waveform
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
F3
P197 Maracas
127
-11
+0
+0
F#3
P189 CongaLo
127
-16
+0
G3
P191 CongaSlp 127
-13
G#3
P190 CongaMt
127
A3
P213 Mellow
A#3
EF2
Lvel
off short off
a
b
a
b
90
+7
1 2
+0
off
off
a
b
a
b
100
+5
1 2
+0
+0
off long
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
+7
+0
+0
off norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+6
1 2
127
-34
-20
+0
off norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+3
1 2
P216 Seq2
127
-32
-20
+0
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+3
1 2
B3
P201 Timbale
127
+6
+0
+0
off norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+3
1 2
C4
P206 E.P. Np
127
+12
+0
+0
off norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
C#4
P136 DistWvLp 127
-15
+0
+0
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
D4
P200 Temp1BIK 127
-48
+15
+0
off norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+3
1 2
D#4
P194 Clave
127
-47
-41
+0
off norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
E4
P186 AgogoHi
127
-19
-26
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
F4
P184 VcDrmBD
127
+0
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
F#4
P217 OrchHit1 127
+36
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
G4
P178 RideBell 127
-14
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
G#4
P185 VcDrmSD
127
-6
+0
+0
off
verylong
off
a
b
a
b
90
+5
1 2
A4
P094 Kalimba
110
-8
+0
+0
off long
off
a
b
a
b
93
+5
1 2
A#4
P207 Bamboo
127
-17
+19
+0
off norm
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
B4
P205 Bottle
127
-31
+20
+0
off long
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
C5
P208 Temp Ra
93
-3
+0
+0
off
off
a
b
a
b
127
+5
1 2
Mode
Effect 1
off
Type: 69 :
/
serial
Effect 2
25
-7
P2
verylong
Output Level b
P3
+6
P4 +12
Wet : Dry 50 : 50
100%
P5 2.7
P6 1.0
Output Level b
100%
50
P8 12.0
+0
P3
+5
P4
P5
+0
Wet : Dry 100 : 0
100%
0.8
P6 1.5
Mix Level
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
Out1 wet
Min
0
Max
100
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
EF1 prm5
Min
0
Max
50
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
P7
Pit & Rev
Output Level a
Param. P1
verylong
parallel
100%
P2 2.0
Type: 67 :
verylong
Dist & Rev
Output Level a
Param. P1
/
verylong
Rvs
VelS DryOut
EF1
Effect
Gate
Insert 1b
100
tri
Insert 2a
Speed
APPENDIX /
0
P7
50
P8 9.0
Insert 2b
100
Delay
0
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
299
● INITIAL MULTI “InitSong”
Multi Song Name InitSong
Inst Number
Inst
1 :
VI I A1
2 :
VI I A1
3 :
VI I A1
4 :
VI I A1
5 :
VI I A1
6 :
VI I A1
7 :
VI I A1
8 :
VI I A1
9 :
VI I A1
10 :
VI I A1
11 :
VI I A1
12 :
VI I A1
13 :
VI I A1
14 :
VI I A1
15 :
VI I A1
16 :
VI I H8
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Volume
127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127
Pan
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
Note Shift
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0 (+0)
Tune
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0
+0 (+0)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Effect Send
vce
16
Source
MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT MLT VCE
Switch
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Dry Output
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
Select
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
Effect
Mode
Level
Effect 1
Type
off
/
serial
:
50
/
parallel
EQ→Rev1
Output Level a
Param. P1
Effect 2
2.0
Type
Output Level b
P2
:
52
P3
+12
500
P5
1.4
P6 0.9
P7
Output Level b
P2 +12
P3 500
P4
+12
P5 Smll P6
10
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
Ef1 prm8
Min
0
Max
98
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
Ef2 prm8
Min
0
Max
42
Additional
APPENDIX /
86
P8
0
36
Wet : Dry 100 :
100
Mix Level
Effect LFO Waveform
300
+12
Wet : Dry 100 :
EQ→ER
Output Level a
Param. P1 2.0
P4
100
Insert 1b
tri
100
Speed
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
Insert 2a
0
P7
0
Insert 2b
Delay
P8
0
9
100
● SYSTEM SETUP
Synth
Note shift
+0
MIDI
T.Ch
R.Ch omni
Velocity
Curve
Sequencer
01
Tune
Ctrl Reset
+0
Device No. all
Fix
0
off
Volume Ctrl
007
Bulk Protect
on
Beat
1/4
Clock
int
MIDI Control
Recording
AT
off
R.Ch
kbd
Accent 1
56
Accent 2
88
Accent 3
Song
Loop
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
Program Change off
Source
A1
/
normal
A2
A3
direct
A4
A5
/
on
120
Fix
kbd
B6
B7
B8
off
Chain
/
on
off
Click
off
on
Local
table
A6
A7
B5
Bank(MSB) 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Bank(LSB) 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064
Program
000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Source
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Bank(MSB) 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Bank(LSB) 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064
Program
000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Source
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Bank(MSB) 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Bank(LSB) 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064
Program
000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Source
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
Bank(MSB) 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
Bank(LSB) 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064 064
Program
000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
301
● INITIAL PERFORMANCE LIST (1)
The illustrations here are not available.
302
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
303
● INITIAL PERFORMANCE LIST (2)
The illustrations here are not available.
304
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
305
● INITIAL VOICE LIST (1)
The illustrations here are not available.
306
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
● INITIAL VOICE LIST (2)
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
307
● INITIAL VOICE LIST (3)
The illustrations here are not available.
308
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
● INITIAL VOICE LIST (4)
The illustrations here are not available.
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
309
● WAVE LIST
Wave No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
310
Group
Piano
Keyboard
Brass
Wind
Strings
A.Guitar
Wave Name
Piano
HardEp
HardEpLp
SoftEp
SoftEpLp
SynthEp
SynthEpLp
Clavi 1
Clavi 1Lp
Clavi 2
Clavi 2Lp
Harpsi
HarpsiLp
Acrdion
AcrdionLp
Organ 1
Organ 1Lp
PrcOrg1
PrcOrg1Lp
PrcOrg2
PrcOrg2Lp
RockOrg
Pipe Wv
Pipe WvLp
Trumpet
TrumpetLp
MuteTp
MuteTpLp
Trombone
TromBneLp
Horn
Tuba
TpEns
TpEnsLp
BrsEns
BrsEnsLp
Baritone
BaritneLp
Tenor
TenorLp
AltoSax
AltoSaxLp
Soprano
SopranoLp
Clarinet
Bassoon
Oboe
EngHorn
Piccolo
Recorder
Flute
Panflute
PnFluteLp
Strings1
Strngs1Lp
Strings2
Violin
Viola
Pizz
GtrSteel
GtrStelLp
APPENDIX /
Wave No.
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
Group
E.Guitar
Bass
Folk
Synth
Wave Name
GtrNyln
GtrNylnLp
12String
12StrngLp
EgSngl1
EgSngl1Lp
EgSngl2
EgSngl2Lp
EgMute1
EgMute2
EgComp
EgCompLp
EgHarm1
EgHarm1Lp
EgHarm2
EgHarm2Lp
WoodBass
FingBs
FingBsLp
PickBs1
PickBs1Lp
PickBs2
PickBs2Lp
FretLess
FretLs Lp
ThumpBs
ThumpBsLp
SlapBs
SlapBsLp
Dulcimer
DulcimrD
DlcmSplt
Kalimba
Sitar
Harp
SynBrs1
SynBrs1Lp
SynBrs2
SynBrs2Lp
SynBrs3
SynBrs3Lp
SynBrs4
SynBrs4Lp
SynBrsWv
SynBs1
SynBs1Lp
SynBs2
SynBs2Lp
SynBs3
SynBs3Lp
SynBs4
SynBs4Lp
SynBs5
SynBs5Lp
SynBs6
SynBs6Lp
SynBs7
SynBs7Lp
SynBs8
SynBs8Lp
SynBs9
Wave No.
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
Group
Choir
Tuned
Percussion
Drum
Wave Name
SynBs9Lp
SynBs10
SynBs10Lp
Pad 1
Pad 1Lp
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
Pad 5
SynLead1
SynLead2
SynStWv
DistWv
DistWvLp
ChoirAa
ChoirAaLp
ChoirOo
ChoirOoLp
Itopia
Glocken
HandBell
HndBellLp
Marimba
SteelDrm
Tubular
TubularLp
Vibes
Xylophon
BD1
BD2
BD3
BD4
BD5
BD6
BD7
BD8
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD side
Tom1
Tom2
HH Open
HH Pedal
HH light
HH mid
HH heavy
Crash
Ride
RideBell
AnlgTom
HHopAnlg
HHclAnlg
Scratch
RezClick
Wave No.
Group
184
185
Percussion
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
SE
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
Osc
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
Wave Name
VcDrmBD
VcDrmSD
AgogoHi
Bongo
Cabasa
CongaLo
CongaMt
CongaSlp
AnaConga
Clap
Clave
AnaCwbl
Cowbell
Maracas
Tmbrine
Timpani
TemplBlk
Timbale
Timbale2
Triangle
Whistle
Bottle
E.P. Np
Bamboo
Temp Ra
Typist
VoiceAtk
ChouCho
Vox Bell
Mellow
Bell Mix
Seq1
Seq2
OrchHit1
OrchHit2
Noise
AnlgSaw1
AnlgSaw2
Pulse 10
Pulse 25
Pulse 50
Digital1
Digital2
Digital3
Digital4
Digital5
Digital6
Digital7
Digital8
Digital9
Digitl10
Digitl11
Digitl12
DigiVox1
DigiVox2
DigiVox3
DigiVox4
DigiVox5
DigiWild
Tri
Sin
● BLANK CHART — PERFORMANCE
Performance Name
Voice Number
Total Level
A :
B :
C :
Layer
D :
A
B
A
Quick Edit
AEG
R4
Pan
RR
Note Shift
Vel. Sense
Fine Tune
LFO
Speed
Note Limit
Depth
Vel. Limit
Filter
Cutoff
CS3 Enable
Resonance
CS4 Enable
Vel. Sense
Effect Send
A
1a
1b
2a
2b
Switch
B
1a
1b
2a
2b
C
1a
1b
2a
2b
D
Con-
AT
1a
1b
2a
2b
trol
MW
FC
AT > MW
Level
MW > AT
Vel.Sense
Sustain
Key.Scale
Effect 1
D1
D2
D1
D2
D1
D2
Mode
off
Type
:
/
serial
/
Param. P1
Type
P2
Fixed Note
parallel
Output Level b
P3
P4
P5
Wet : Dry
P6
P7
P2
Output Level b
P8
P3
P4
P5
Wet : Dry
P6
P7
Mix Level
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
:
:
Output Level a
Param. P1
Pitch EG
D1
D2
Output Level a
Effect 2
D
R2, R3
Volume
Dry Output
Select
Effect
C
R1
D
C
B
Insert 1b
Insert 2a
Speed
APPENDIX /
:
P8
Insert 2b
Delay
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
311
● BLANK CHART — VOICE
Voice Name
Total Level
Oscillator
Mode
normal
/
fixed
Phase
LFO
Waveform
Waveform
Fine Tune
Speed
Fixed Note
Depth
Random
SpeedSens Random
Pmod
Reverse
Amod
Fmod
Vel.
Key Scale
Amplitude EG
Mode
atk / hold
R1 / HT
Scaling
BP1
L2
L3
R2
R3
BP4
BP3
BP2
R4
RR
Sensitivity
Velocity
Note
Atk Rate Vel
Offset
Rate Scaling
Filter
Cutoff freq
EG
Type
Band
Reso
CTRL
L0
L1
L1
L3
L4
RL1
RL2
RS
R1
R2
R3
R4
RR1
RR2
Scaling
BP3
BP2
BP1
BP4
Sensitivity
Type
Note
Velocity
Offset
Attack Rate Vel
Pitch
Velocity
Range
EG
Controller
312
Delay
Rate Velocity
L0
L1
L2
L3
RL1
RS
R1
R2
R3
RR
Loop
Volume Low Limit
PB Range
Amod
Pmod
Fmod
EG Bias
Cutoff
FC
Amod
Pmod
Fmod
EG Bias
Cutoff
AT
Amod
Pmod
Fmod
EG Bias
Cutoff
CS3(#=18) Parameter
Min
Max
CS4(#=19) Parameter
Min
Max
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
/
off
Sustain SW
MW
APPENDIX /
on
Pitch Bias
Effect
Effect 1
Mode
off
Type:
:
/
serial
Output Level a
Param. P1
Effect 2
Type:
P2
parallel
Send
EF2 Mix
Output Level b
P3
P4
P5
Wet :Dry
P6
P7
P8
P2
P6
P7
P8
Output Level b
P3
P4
P5
Control 1
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
:
:
Output Level a
Param. P1
/
Speed
APPENDIX /
Delay
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
313
● BLANK CHART — DRUM VOICE
Voice Name
Total Level
Vol Lo Limit
Key Parameters
VelS DryOut
EF1
EF2
C1
a
b
a
b
1 2
C#1
a
b
a
b
1 2
D1
a
b
a
b
1 2
D#1
a
b
a
b
1 2
E1
a
b
a
b
1 2
F1
a
b
a
b
1 2
F#1
a
b
a
b
1 2
G1
a
b
a
b
1 2
G#1
a
b
a
b
1 2
A1
a
b
a
b
1 2
A#1
a
b
a
b
1 2
B1
a
b
a
b
1 2
C2
a
b
a
b
1 2
C#2
a
b
a
b
1 2
D2
a
b
a
b
1 2
D#2
a
b
a
b
1 2
E2
a
b
a
b
1 2
F2
a
b
a
b
1 2
F#2
a
b
a
b
1 2
G2
a
b
a
b
1 2
G#2
a
b
a
b
1 2
A2
a
b
a
b
1 2
A#2
a
b
a
b
1 2
B2
a
b
a
b
1 2
C3
a
b
a
b
1 2
C#3
a
b
a
b
1 2
D3
a
b
a
b
1 2
D#3
a
b
a
b
1 2
E3
a
b
a
b
1 2
Note
314
Effect Send
Waveform
APPENDIX /
Vol.
Nsft
Tune
Pan
AltG
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
Gate
Rvs
Lvel
Key Parameters
Note
Waveform
EF1
EF2
F3
a
b
a
b
1 2
F#3
a
b
a
b
1 2
G3
a
b
a
b
1 2
G#3
a
b
a
b
1 2
A3
a
b
a
b
1 2
A#3
a
b
a
b
1 2
B3
a
b
a
b
1 2
C4
a
b
a
b
1 2
C#4
a
b
a
b
1 2
D4
a
b
a
b
1 2
D#4
a
b
a
b
1 2
E4
a
b
a
b
1 2
F4
a
b
a
b
1 2
F#4
a
b
a
b
1 2
G4
a
b
a
b
1 2
G#4
a
b
a
b
1 2
A4
a
b
a
b
1 2
A#4
a
b
a
b
1 2
B4
a
b
a
b
1 2
C5
a
b
a
b
1 2
Effect
Effect 1
Vol.
Mode
off
Type:
:
Nsft
/
Tune
Effect Send
serial
/
Pan
Effect 2
Type:
P2
Rvs
Output Level b
P3
P4
VelS DryOut
P5
Wet : Dry
P6
P7
P2
Output Level b
:
P8
P3
P4
P5
Wet : Dry
P7
P6
Mix Level
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
Effect LFO Waveform
Lvel
:
Output Level a
Param. P1
Gate
parallel
Output Level a
Param. P1
AltG
Insert 1b
Insert 2a
Speed
APPENDIX /
:
P8
Insert 2b
Delay
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
315
● BLANK CHART — MULTI
Multi Song Name
Inst Number
Inst
1 :
2 :
3 :
4 :
5 :
6 :
7 :
8 :
9 :
10 :
11 :
12 :
13 :
14 :
15 :
16 :
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1a
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
1b
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2a
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
2b
Dry Output
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
D1
Select
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
D2
Effect
Mode
Volume
Pan
Note Shift
Tune
Effect Send
Source
Switch
Level
Effect 1
off
Type
/
serial
/
parallel
:
Output Level a
Param. P1
Effect 2
Output Level b
P2
Type
P3
P6
P7
P2
Output Level b
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
EF2
Control 1
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
Control 2
Parameter
Min
Max
Additional
APPENDIX /
P8
Wet : Dry
Mix Level
Effect LFO Waveform
316
P5
:
:
Output Level a
Param. P1
P4
Wet : Dry
Insert 1b
Insert 2a
Speed
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
Insert 2b
Delay
:
P8
● BLANK CHART — SYSTEM SETUP
Synth
Note shift
MIDI
T.Ch
Velocity
Curve
Sequencer
Tune
R.Ch
Device No.
Ctrl Reset
Local
Volume Ctrl
Bulk Protect
Fix
Click
Beat
Clock
MIDI Control
Recording
AT
R.Ch
Accent 1
Accent 2
Song
Loop
Program Change off
Source
/
Accent 3
Fix
Chain
normal
/
direct
/
table
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
Bank(MSB)
Bank(LSB)
Program
Source
Bank(MSB)
Bank(LSB)
Program
Source
Bank(MSB)
Bank(LSB)
Program
Source
Bank(MSB)
Bank(LSB)
Program
APPENDIX /
INITIAL DATA & BLANK CHART
317
About the Standard MIDI File Format
The Standard MIDI File Format is a standard which has recently been implemented by a number of software and
hardware makers. This standardized format allows song data to be transferred easily between different sequencers —
even between sequencers made by different manufacturers.
The SY85 supports two Standard MIDI File types, known as format 0 and format 1. In the former type, all
sequencer data is recorded as a single track, which may include data for more than one MIDI channel. In the latter,
an unlimited number of tracks may be used, each of which may contain data for more than one channel. The SY85
is capable of loading data saved in either of these formats. Data saved by the SY85 using the Standard MIDI File
format will be saved as format 0.
Loading data: To load sequencer data saved in an Standard MIDI File format, select load operation type Other
Load from the disk menu. The file to be loaded must meet the following conditions:
• The File must be loaded from a disk formatted by the SY85, or from a 3.5 inch 2DD floppy disk in
MS-DOS® or PC-DOS® format. (Refer to the paragraph titled Acceptable disk formats, below.)
• It must have been saved as Standard MIDI File format 0 or format 1. Files saved using Standard MIDI File
format 2 cannot be loaded.
• The MIDI clock must be used as the basic clock.
• The file must have a resolution of 1/96, 192, 288, 384, 480 of a quarter note.
• The file must have an extension .X01 through .X99.
When a format 0 file is loaded, the data for each MIDI channel is loaded to the corresponding track (channel 1
to Track 1, channel 2 to Track 2, and so on). Only data for channels 1 through 8 is loaded, however; any data
for channel 9 through 16 will be ignored.
When a format 1 file is loaded, tracks are loaded in sequence. It will therefore be necessary to reset the
channel assignments for each track when loading is complete.
All data loaded to a single track in this way will be transmitted by the SY85 on a single channel. For this
reason, even if one track of a format 1 file contains data for two or more MIDI channels, all this data will be
played back by the SY85 using a single channel. Since this may mean that sequencer parts may not play back as
desired, we recommend that format 0 be used for the transfer of data whenever possible.
No exclusive data is loaded from Standard MIDI Files of either format type.
Saving data: Data may be saved in Standard MIDI File format to any of the disk types described in Acceptable
disk formats, below. To save sequencer data in Standard MIDI File format, select save operation type Other
Save from the disk menu. The data for each track is saved to the corresponding MIDI channel (Track 1 to
channel 1, Track 2 to channel 2, and so on). No exclusive data is saved when this format is used.
Files saved using the Standard MIDI File format are given a file extension .X01 through .X99, which allows
the SY85 to recognize the file’s format. Other programs, however, may not be able to recognize the file as a
Standard MIDI File unless the .MID extension is used; when transferring data saved by the SY85 to another
device where it will be used by such a program, you should first rename the file using a personal computer or
other means.
Acceptable disk formats: Standard MIDI Files may of course be saved to or loaded from disks formatted by the
SY85. Disks formatted by a personal computer may also be used, as long as they are 2DD disks in
MS-DOS® or PC-DOS® format. Disks formatted by an Apple Macintosh® may used as long as they are formatted using a SuperDrive or other disk drive device capable of formatting a disk in MS-DOS® format.
To use Standard MIDI Files saved by the SY85 on an Apple Macintosh®, use ResEdit or a similar utility to
change the file type attribute to that of a MIDI file.
* MS-DOS® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
* PC-DOS® is a registered trademark of International business Machines Corporation.
* Macintosh® is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
318
APPENDIX /
About the Standard MIDI File Format
SPECIFICATIONS
Keyboard
61 keys, initial and after-touch response.
Tone Generator Systems
AWM2 (2nd-generation Advanced Wave Memory), 30-note polyphony.
Internal Memory
Wave ROM: 6 megabytes (48 Mbits).
Wave RAM: 0.5 megabyte, expandable to 3.5 megabytes.
Internal RAM: 256 voices, 128 performance combinations,
10 multi-play setups.
External Memory
3.5” 2DD floppy disk drive.
MCD64 memory card for voice data (DATA x 1, WAVE x 1).
Sequencer
Tracks: 9 (8 normal + 1 rhythm).
Songs: 10 songs.
Simultaneous notes: 30.
Capacity: Approx. 20,000 notes.
Patterns: 100.
Record modes: Real-time, step, and punch-in.
Resolution: 1/48 quarter note (internal clock),
1/24 quarter note (MIDI sync).
Effects
90 types (dual DSP units).
Displays
40-character x 2-line LCD.
27 LEDs.
Controllers
Wheels: pitch, modulation.
Sliders: Output x 2, function x 8.
Dial: Data entry dial.
Panel Switches
53: function select matrix x 10, exit, enter, store, memory x 3, group x 8,
program x 8, function x 8, data entry x 2, page x 3, sequencer x 6,
others x 2.
Connectors
Headphones, audio output x 4, foot controller, sustain switch, volume
pedal, MIDI in, MIDI out, MIDI thru.
Power Requirements
US & Canadian models: 120 VAC, 20 W.
General model: 220 … 240 VAC, 20 W.
Dimensions (W x D x H)
1024 x 367 x 119 mm (3’4-3/8” x 14-1/2” x 4-3/4”)
Weight
14 kg (30 lbs. 13 oz)
* Specifications and appearance subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX /
SPECIFICATIONS
319
ERROR MESSAGE
● MIDI
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
MIDI`buffer`full`!
When the SY85 attempted to receive or transmit a large amount
of MIDI data, its handling capacity was exceeded.
MIDI`data`error`!
An error occurred when receiving MIDI data.
MIDI`checksum`err`!
An error occurred when receiving bulk data.
MIDI`Bulk`canceled`!
While receiving or transmitting bulk data, [EXIT/NO] was pressed
to abort the operation.
Bulk`protected`!
Since the “Bulk Protect” parameter is on, the bulk data was not
received.
Device`number`is`off`!
Since the device number is off, bulk data cannot be transmintted
or received.
Device`number`mismatch`!
Since the device numbers did not match, the bulk data was not
received.
● Data card
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
Data`card`not`ready`!
The data card is not correctly inserted into the slot.
Card`protected`!
Since the memory protect switch of the card is on, data cannot
be saved to the card.
Illegal`format`!
The card is the wrong format.
Verify`NG`!
The data was not correctly saved.
● Wave card
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
Wave`card`not`ready`!
The wave card is not correctly inserted into the slot.
ID`Number`mismatch`!
A multi includes voices which use two or more wave cards.
320
APPENDIX /
ERROR MESSAGES
● Disk
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
Disk`not`ready`!
The disk is not correctly inserted into the disk drive.
Illegal`change`!
During the backup operation, the original and backup disks were
inserted in the wrong order.
Illegal`disk`!
The data in the disk is faulty.
Bad`disk`!
The disk is faulty.
File`not`found`!
The file was not found, or you attempted to load a file that does
not have a legal MS-DOS file name.
Write`protected`!
The disk is write protected.
Disk`full`!
There is no more memory available on the disk.
Media`type`error`!
The disk is the wrong type.
Illegal`file`!
The file is not for the SY85.
● Sequencer
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
Please`stop`sequencer`!
The sequencer cannot play during disk or card loading/saving or
during bulk data transmission.
Mark`not`used`!
Rhythm track search was performed on a track which contains
no mark.
Internal`buffer`full`!
More sequence data was played back than could be sounded.
Data`Empty`!
You have attempted to perform a song job on a measure that
contains no data.
Song`Memory`full`!
The sequencer’s internal memory is full. Execution of song jobs,
bulk reception, and loading from disks is not possible.
● Battery
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
Change`internal`battery`!
The internal backup battery needs to be replaced.
Change`card`battery`!
The card backup battery needs to be replaced.
APPENDIX /
ERROR MESSAGES
321
● Sample
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
Sample`memory`full`!
Since the sample memory is full, further loading of
sample data is not possible.
Not`enough`memory`for`Volatie`!
Not enough volatile memory.
Wave memory allocation setting cannot be changed.
Not`enough`memory`for`Non_Vol.`!
Not enough non-volatile memory.
Wave memory allocation setting cannot be changed.
Sample`data`not`exists`!
Since no sample exists in the specified sample number,
bulk transmission is not possible.
Sample`data`protected`!
Since the waveform card is write protected, data save
and bulk transmission are not possible.
Over`internal`waveform`number`!
The maximum allowable number of waves was exceeded.
Over`Sample`number`!
The maximum allowable number of samples was exceeded.
● MDR
DISPLAY
COMMENTS
MDR`memory`full`!
Since the MDR’s memory is full, loading of data is not
possible.
MDR`data`already`exists`!
Since MDR data already exists, input of data is not
possible.
MDR`data`not`found`!
No data exists in the specified MDR file.
322
APPENDIX /
ERROR MESSAGES
APPENDIX /
ERROR MESSAGES
323
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The SY85 is a very versatile instrument with many features and functions that affect operation. In
many cases, what appears to be a fault with the SY85 can actually be traced to an improperly set parameter or, at the most fundamental level, to something as simple as a bad connection.
Here’s how to determine if the problem is internal (e.g. parameter settings) or external (e.g. connections, amplifier, etc.):
● Listen Via Headphones.
Plug a pair of headphones into the SY85 and play. If the headphone sound is OK, then the problem
is most likely in the amplifier or mixer you are using, or the audio connection cables.
● Check the Sound In the Voice, Performance, and Song Modes.
If the problem only occurs in one mode or one voice/performance/song, then the cause is most likely
a parameter setting related to that mode or voice/performance/song. If the problem occurs in all modes,
then the cause may be a utility parameter or other parameter that affects all modes.
The following are some common problems and probable causes:
● Amplifier, Mixer, Connection Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
No Sound
•
•
•
•
Is the amplifier/mixer power turned on?
Is the amplifier/mixer volume set to an appropriate level?
Are the SY85 outputs properly connected to the amplifier/mixer inputs?
Are the connection cables shorted, open, or otherwise faulty?
Distorted sound
• Is the SY85 connected to a high-sensitivity microphone or instrument input
on your amplifier or mixer? Try turning the SY85 OUTPUT controls down to
avoid overloading the amplifier/mixer inputs.
● Performance Mode Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
No Sound
•
•
•
•
Wrong pitch.
• Are the note shift parameters for each voice set to appropriate values
(page 17)?.
324
APPENDIX /
Are voices properly assigned to the performance layers (page 14)?
Are the voice volume parameters set high enough (page 15)?
Is the total performance level set high enough (page 24)?
Are the voice note and velocity parameters set to appropriate values (page
18 through 21)?
• If a foot volume pedal is connected or a controller is assigned to volume
control, is the controller set to produce a high enough volume level (page
31)?
TROUBLE SHOOTING
● Voice Mode Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
No Sound
• Is the pitch envelope generator set properly? If the L0 through L3 parameters are set too low, the resultant pitch may be below the audible range
(page 74).
• Is the filter set in such a way that most of the sound is filtered out (page
65)?
• Is the total voice level set high enough (page 94)?
• Is the amplitude envelope generator attack time set to an excessively long
value (page 60)?
• Is an appropriate wave assigned to the voice (page 58)?
Wrong pitch.
• Is the tuning set properly (page 58)?.
• Is the note shift parameter set properly (page 59)?.
Unstable/indefinite pitch.
• Is the random pitch parameter set properly (page 59)?.
• Is the aftertouch pitch bias parameter set properly (page 88)?.
• Is the LFO pitch modulation parameter set to an excessively high value
(page 78)?.
• Is the pitch envelope generator set properly (page 74)?.
● Song Mode Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
No Sound
• Are voices/performance combinations properly assigned to the multi instruments (page 148).
• Are the volume levels of the multi instruments set high enough (page 149)?
• Are the sequencer track transmit channels properly matched to the multi
instrument channels (Getting Started manual, page 47)?
Wrong pitch.
• Are the note shift parameters for each multi instrument set properly (page
152)?.
• Are the tune parameters for each multi instrument set properly (page 153)?.
Some notes not played during
sequencer playback.
• Does the sequence data exceed the maximum polyphony of the SY85
(page 157)?.
● Other Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
No Sound
• Is the local off mode selected (page 211).
• Are the keyboard transmit channel and voice receive channels matched
(page 212)?
Wrong pitch.
• Is the master tune parameter set properly (page 210)?.
APPENDIX /
TROUBLE SHOOTING
325
INDEX
A
Accent velocity ..................................................... 220
Additional MIDI control ..................... 46, 111, 137
AEG data copy ....................................................... 64
Aftertouch ....................................................... 31, 219
Aftertouch depth ..................................................... 87
Aftertouch events ................................................. 160
Alternate group ..................................................... 122
Amplitude EG ......................................................... 98
Amplitude EG offset .............................................. 27
Amplitude envelope generator .............................. 60
Amplitude modulation depth ............ 79, 83, 85, 87
Attack mode ............................................................ 60
Attack rate .........................................................27, 99
Attack rate velocity sensitivity .......................63, 72
B
Bandwidth ................................................................ 67
Bank select ............................................................ 215
Beat ........................................................................ 217
BEF filter response ................................................ 67
Blank chart ............................................................ 311
BPF filter response ................................................ 67
Bulk dump ............................................................. 222
C
Card format ........................................................... 224
Card load/save ...................................................... 223
Cascade effect parameters ................................... 277
Change mode......................................................... 158
Clear pattern .......................................................... 203
Clear song .............................................................. 179
Click condition ..................................................... 217
Clock ...................................................................... 217
Clock move ........................................................... 195
Continuous sliders .................................................. 10
Control change events ......................................... 159
Control device number ........................................ 175
Control LFO .......................................... 47, 138, 176
Control parameters ...................... 45, 110, 136, 174
Control reset .......................................................... 210
Controller ................................................................. 31
Controller assignment display .............................. 11
326
APPENDIX /
INDEX
Controller data copy .............................................. 93
Copy measure ........................................................ 188
Copy pattern .......................................................... 202
Copy song .............................................................. 180
Crescendo .............................................................. 200
CS enable ................................................................ 22
CS1/CS2 switch ........................... 45, 110, 136, 174
CS3 parameter edit ................................................. 89
CS4 parameter edit ................................................. 91
Cutoff frequency ............................................ 65, 100
Cutoff frequency depth ............................. 84, 86, 88
Cutoff scaling .......................................................... 69
D
Data entry dial .................................................... 9, 10
Decay rate................................................................ 27
Delay .......................................47, 79, 112, 138, 176
Delete file .............................................................. 231
Delete measure ...................................................... 190
Delete rhythm track ............................................. 182
Delete track ........................................................... 185
Device number ...................................................... 212
Disk backup........................................................... 232
Disk format ........................................................... 235
Disk load/save ....................................................... 225
Disk status ............................................................. 234
Drum key data copy ............................................ 125
Drum total level ................................................... 123
Drum voice compare ............................................ 145
Drum voice edit recall ......................................... 143
Drum voice initialize ........................................... 144
Drum voice name ................................................. 124
Drum voice store .................................................. 146
Dry output ............................................. 40, 131, 169
Dual effect parameters ......................................... 281
E
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
1 parameters ..................... 44, 109, 135, 173
2 mix level ....................... 43, 106, 134, 172
2 parameters ..................... 44, 109, 135, 173
configuration ............................................. 254
data copy .......................... 48, 113, 139, 177
LFO ............................................................ 112
mode .................................. 37, 105, 128, 166
Effect parameter ...........36, 45, 104, 110, 136, 174
Effect send level ................................................... 151
Effect signal flow diagrams ....................... 256, 264
Effect signal flow display .......... 49, 114, 140, 178
Effect source ......................................................... 167
Effect type ............................ 35, 37, 103, 105, 126,
.............................................................. 128, 154, 166
EG bias depth ............................................ 84, 86, 88
EG level & rate ...................................................... 70
End of track .......................................................... 158
Erase measure ....................................................... 192
Error messages ...................................................... 320
Initial drum voice data ........................................ 292
Initial multi data ................................................... 300
Initial performance data ...................................... 289
Initial voice data................................................... 290
Insert measure ....................................................... 191
Insert mode ............................................................ 161
Instrument change ................................................ 204
Internal performance list ..................................... 302
Internal voice list ................................................. 306
K
F
Filter ....................................................................... 100
Filter control ........................................................... 68
Filter cutoff frequency ........................................... 30
Filter cutoff frequency modulation depth ........... 79
Filter data copy ....................................................... 73
Filter offset .............................................................. 29
Filter resonance ...................................................... 30
Filter type ....................................................... 65, 100
Fine ........................................................................... 58
Fine tuning .............................................................. 17
Foot controller ........................................................ 31
Foot controller depth ............................................. 85
Frequency modulation depth .................... 84, 86, 88
Function keys .......................................................... 10
G
Gate time ............................................................... 122
Gate time modify ................................................. 199
H
High note limit .......................................................
High velocity limit .................................................
Hold mode ...............................................................
HPF filter response ................................................
I
19
21
61
66
Key data exchange ............................................... 142
Key data initialize ................................................ 141
Key note shift ....................................................... 120
Key number .................................................. 120, 122
Key on velocity curve ......................................... 216
Key pan .................................................................. 121
Key parameters ............................................ 120, 122
Key scaling .............................................................. 80
Key tune ................................................................ 121
Key volume ........................................................... 120
Key-on velocity sensitivity ................................... 72
L
Layer controller sync ............................................. 50
Layer data copy ...................................................... 23
Layer exchange ....................................................... 51
Layer voice edit menu ........................................... 26
Level & rate ............................................................ 74
Level scaling ........................................................... 62
Level/rate switch .................................................... 70
LFO .......................................................................... 78
LFO data copy ........................................................ 81
LFO depth ...................................................... 29, 102
LFO modulation type ........................................... 102
LFO offset ............................................................... 29
LFO speed ...............................29, 47, 78, 102, 112,
....................................................................... 138, 176
LFO waveform .......................47, 78, 112, 138, 176
Local on/off ........................................................... 211
Loop ....................................................... 75, 221, 246
APPENDIX /
INDEX
327
Low
Low
Low
LPF
and high limits ............................................ 246
note limit ........................................................ 18
velocity limit .................................................. 20
filter response ................................................. 66
M
Master tuning ........................................................ 210
Max. ...................................................................90, 92
Maximum parameter value ......... 46, 111, 137, 175
MDR ....................................................................... 228
Measure dividers .................................................. 158
Memory expansion modules ............................... 285
Memory installation ............................................. 286
Memory status ....................................................... 181
Memory type ......................................................... 247
Menu key ....................................................................8
MIDI control enable ............................................ 218
Min. ....................................................................90, 92
Minimum foot volume level ................................. 82
Minimum parameter value ......... 45, 110, 136, 174
Minimum volume level ....................................... 123
Mode ........................................................................ 58
Mode matrix ...............................................................8
Modulation wheel ................................................... 31
Modulation wheel depth ........................................ 83
Multi Initialize ...................................................... 156
N
Note .......................................................................... 59
Note events ............................................................ 159
Note limit ................................................................ 18
Note shift ...................................... 17, 152, 197, 210
O
Original note ......................................................... 244
Oscillator ................................................................. 58
Oscillator fix ........................................................... 33
Oscillator fix note number .................................... 34
Out 1 dry ............................................................... 107
Out 1 wet ............................................................... 106
Output level .................................. 41, 108, 132, 170
328
APPENDIX /
INDEX
P
Page keys ....................................................................8
Pan ................................................................... 16, 150
Pattern name.......................................................... 207
Pattern number ...................................................... 162
Performance compare ............................................. 54
Performance edit recall .......................................... 52
Performance initialize ............................................ 53
Performance name .................................................. 25
Performance volume .............................................. 24
Performance store ................................................... 55
Phase ........................................................................ 79
Pitch........................................................................ 245
Pitch bend events ................................................. 160
Pitch bend range ..................................................... 82
Pitch bias depth ...................................................... 88
Pitch EG enable ...................................................... 33
Pitch EG rate scaling ............................................. 75
Pitch EG rate velocity sensitivity ........................ 76
Pitch EG velocity sensitivity ................................ 76
Pitch EG data copy ................................................ 77
Pitch modulation depth ...................... 78, 83, 85, 87
Program change events ........................................ 160
Program change number ...................................... 215
Program change table .......................................... 215
Program change type ........................................... 213
Q
Quantize ................................................................. 186
R
Random ..............................................................59, 80
Range........................................................................ 76
Rate scaling .......................................................63, 71
Rates and levels ...................................................... 60
Receive channel ........................................... 212, 219
Record condition .................................................. 219
Release rate .......................................................28, 99
Remove event ........................................................ 193
Rename file ........................................................... 231
Repeats ................................................................... 162
Resonance ....................................................... 68, 101
Reverse ............................................................ 59, 122
Rhythm track copy ............................................... 164
Rhythm track delete ............................................. 164
Rhythm track edit ................................................. 162
Rhythm track search ............................................ 165
Rhythm track insert .............................................. 163
S
Sample ........................................................... 244, 246
Sample data ........................................................... 245
Sample dump receive ........................................... 248
Sample dump transmit ......................................... 249
Sample key map ................................................... 243
Sample load/save .................................................. 251
Search mark........................................................... 163
Send key scaling..................................................... 39
Send level .................... 38, 43, 106, 127, 130, 134,
.............................................................. 167, 168, 172
Send select............................................................... 38
Send velocity sensitivity .............................. 39, 130
Sensitivity ................................................... 63, 72, 76
Single effect parameters ...................................... 274
Song chain ............................................................. 221
Song name ............................................................. 155
Specifications ........................................................ 319
Speed sensitivity ..................................................... 80
Sustain ...................................................................... 33
Sustain level ............................................................ 99
Sustain switch enable ............................................ 82
Switch..................................................... 38, 129, 167
System .................................................................... 210
System setup data ................................................. 301
V
Velocity .................................................................... 80
Velocity fix ............................................................. 26
Velocity limit .......................................................... 20
Velocity modify ........................................... 198, 205
Velocity sensitivity.................... 28, 30, 63, 99, 101
Velocity sensitivity type ........................................ 72
Voice compare ...................................................... 117
Voice edit recall ................................................... 115
Voice initialize ...................................................... 116
Voice name.............................................................. 95
Voice number .......................................................... 14
Voice select ........................................................... 148
Voice store ............................................................ 118
Voice volume .......................................................... 94
Volume ................................................... 15, 149, 245
Volume change ..................................................... 162
Volume control device ........................................ 213
W
Wave..........................................................58, 96, 120
Wave assign .......................................................... 240
Wave card load ..................................................... 250
Wave initialize ...................................................... 247
Wave list ................................................................ 310
Wave memory allocation ..................................... 247
Wave memory expansion .................................... 285
Wave memory status display .............................. 252
Wave mode access ............................................... 238
Wave name ............................................................ 240
Wave number select ............................................. 239
Wet balance .................................. 35, 103, 126, 154
Wet:dry balance .................................... 42, 133, 171
T
Tempo change ....................................................... 163
Top of track .......................................................... 158
Track edit .............................................................. 157
Track mixdown ..................................................... 183
Transmit channel .................................................. 212
Transpose ............................................................... 196
Troubleshooting .................................................... 324
Tune ................................................................. 17, 153
[-1] and [+1] keys .............................................. 9, 10
APPENDIX /
INDEX
329
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha
ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MIDDLE & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha De Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
FRANCE
ASIA
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Instruments Electroniques et de Scène
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Valée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain
Tel: 91-577-7270
PORTUGAL
Valentim de Carvalho CI SA
Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras,
Portugal
Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823
GREECE
BRASIL
Yamaha Musical Do Brasil LTDA.
Ave. Reboucas 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 55-11 853-1377
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
SWEDEN
PANAMA
Yamaha De Panama S.A.
Edificio Interseco, Calle Elvira Mendez no.10,
Piso 3, Oficina #105, Ciudad de Panama, Panama
Tel: 507-69-5311
OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES
AND CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America Corp.
6101 Blue Lagoon Drive, Miami, Florida 33126,
U.S.A.
Tel: 305-261-4111
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 0908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Limited
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, D-2084 Rellingen, F.R. of
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA/HUNGARY/SLOVENIA/
ROMANIA/BULGARIA
Yamaha Music Austria Ges mbH.
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 0222-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Benelux B.V.,
Verkoop Administratie
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-828411
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Benelux B.V.,
Brussels-office
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J.A. Wettergrens gata 1, Box 30053, 400 43
Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031-496090
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Finsensvej 86, DK-2000 Frederiksberg, Denmark
Tel: 31-87 30 88
FINLAND
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 730-1098
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia(Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
#131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul
Korea
Tel: 02-466-0021~5
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor,
Malaysia
Tel: 3-717-8977
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. BOX 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
Blk 17A Toa Payoh #01-190 Lorong 7
Singapore 1231
Tel: 354-0133
TAIWAN
Fazer Music Inc.
Aleksanterinkatu 11, SF 00100 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 0435 011
NORWAY
Kung Hsue She Trading Co., Ltd.
No. 322, Section 1, FuHsing S. Road,
Taipei 106, Taiwan. R.O.C.
Tel: 02-709-1266
THAILAND
Narud Yamaha AS
Østerndalen 29, 1345 Østerås
Tel: 02-24 47 90
ICELAND
Páll H. Pálsson
P.O. Box 85, 121 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 01-19440
EAST EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
(Except HUNGARY)
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, D-2084 Rellingen, F.R. of
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
865 Phornprapha Building, Rama I Road,
Patumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 2-215-3443
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2311
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2311
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Musique France, Division Export
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Valée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2311
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,
Australia
Tel: 3-699-2388
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2311
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division
SY04
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2445